Scripture · Sanskrit Bible with the King James Version · the Pāli Canon

Search Scripture Search

Chapters on Legal Topics 17 खन्धक 17

Chapter: 12345678910111213141516171819202122

1.1 Chasakyapabbajjākathā

Pāli in Devanagari; under each word its Roman pronunciation, syllable by syllable (ṃ = nasal hum). Tap a Pāli word for its meaning (PTS Pāli-English Dictionary); tap again to open it in the Pāli dictionary.

Verse: 12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970717273747576777879808182838485868788899091929394959697989910010110210310410510610710810911011111211311411511611711811912012112212312412512612712812913013113213313413513613713813914014114214314414514614714814915015115215315415515615715815916016116216316416516616716816917017117217317417517617717817918018118218318418518618718818919019119219319419519619719819920020120220320420520620720820921021121221321421521621721821922022122222322422522622722822923023123223323423523623723823924024124224324424524624724824925025125225325425525625725825926026126226326426526626726826927027127227327427527627727827928028128228328428528628728828929029129229329429529629729829930030130230330430530630730830931031131231331431531631731831932032132232332432532632732832933033133233333433533633733833934034134234334434534634734834935035135235335435535635735835936036136236336436536636736836937037137237337437537637737837938038138238338438538638738838939039139239339439539639739839940040140240340440540640740840941041141241341441541641741841942042142242342442542642742842943043143243343443543643743843944044144244344444544644744844945045145245345445545645745845946046146246346446546646746846947047147247347447547647747847948048148248348448548648748848949049149249349449549649749849950050150250350450550650750850951051151251351451551651751851952052152252352452552652752852953053153253353453553653753853954054154254354454554654754854955055155255355455555655755855956056156256356456556656756856957057157257357457557657757857958058158258358458558658758858959059159259359459559659759859960060160260360460560660760860961061161261361461561661761861962062162262362462562662762862963063163263363463563663763863964064164264364464564664764864965065165265365465565665765865966066166266366466566666766866967067167267367467567667767867968068168268368468568668768868969069169269369469569669769869970070170270370470570670770870971071171271371471571671771871972072172272372472572672772872973073173273373473573673773873974074174274374474574674774874975075175275375475575675775875976076176276376476576676776876977077177277377477577677777877978078178278378478578678778878979079179279379479579679779879980080180280380480580680780880981081181281381481581681781881982082182282382482582682782882983083183283383483583683783883984084184284384484584684784884985085185285385485585685785885986086186286386486586686786886987087187287387487587687787887988088188288388488588688788888989089189289389489589689789889990090190290390490590690790890991091191291391491591691791891992092192292392492592692792892993093193293393493593693793893994094194294394494594694794894995095195295395495595695795895996096196296396496596696796896997097197297397497597697797897998098198298398498598698798898999099199299399499599699799899910001001100210031004100510061007100810091010101110121013101410151016101710181019102010211022102310241025102610271028102910301031103210331034103510361037103810391040104110421043104410451046104710481049105010511052105310541055105610571058105910601061106210631064106510661067106810691070107110721073107410751076107710781079108010811082108310841085108610871088108910901091109210931094109510961097109810991100110111021103110411051106110711081109111011111112 · Hide pronunciation

1. 1

   थेरवादthe·ra·vā·da विनयपिटकvi·na·ya·pi·ṭa·ka

   Theravāda Vinayapiṭaka

   Theravāda Collection on Monastic Law

2. 2

   चूळवग्गcū·ḷa·vag·ga

   Cūḷavagga

   The Small Division

3. 3

   17। सङ्घभेदकक्खन्धकsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·kak·khan·dha·ka

   17. Saṅghabhedakakkhandhaka

   The chapter on schism in the Sangha

4. 4

   The first section for recitation

5. 5

   1।1 छसक्यपब्बज्जाकथाcha·sak·ya·pab·baj·jā·ka·thā

   1.1 Chasakyapabbajjākathā

   1. The account of the going forth of the six Sakyans

6. 6

   तेनte·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपियायंa·nu·pi·yā·yaṃ विहरति,vi·ha·ra·ti अनुपियंa·nu·pi·yaṃ नामnā·ma मल्लानंmal·lā·naṃ निगमो।ni·ga·mo

   Tena samayena buddho bhagavā anupiyāyaṁ viharati, anupiyaṁ nāma mallānaṁ nigamo.

   At one time the Buddha was staying at the Mallian town of Anupiyā.

7. 7

   तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पब्बजितंpab·ba·ji·taṃ अनुपब्बजन्ति।a·nu·pab·ba·jan·ti

   Tena kho pana samayena abhiññātā abhiññātā sakyakumārā bhagavantaṁ pabbajitaṁ anupabbajanti.

   At that time a number of well-known young Sakyans had followed the Buddha in going forth.

8. 8

   तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na महानामोma·hā·nā·mo चca सक्कोsak·ko अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho चca सक्कोsak·ko द्वेभातिकाdve·bhā·ti·kā होन्ति।hon·ti

   Tena kho pana samayena mahānāmo ca sakko anuruddho ca sakko dvebhātikā honti.

   Then there were the brothers Mahānāma and Anuruddha.

9. 9

   अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho सक्कोsak·ko सुखुमालोsu·khu·mā·lo होति।ho·ti

   Anuruddho sakko sukhumālo hoti.

   Anuruddha had been brought up in great comfort.

10. 10

    तस्सtas·sa तयोta·yo पासादाpā·sā·dā होन्ति—hon·ti

    Tassa tayo pāsādā honti—

    He had three stilt houses:

11. 11

    एकोe·ko हेमन्तिको,he·man·ti·ko एकोe·ko गिम्हिको,gim·hi·ko एकोe·ko वस्सिको।vas·si·ko

    eko hemantiko, eko gimhiko, eko vassiko.

    one for the winter, one for the summer, and one for the rainy season.

12. 12

    सोso वस्सिकेvas·si·ke पासादेpā·sā·de चत्तारोcat·tā·ro मासेmā·se निप्पुरिसेहिnip·pu·ri·se·hi तूरियेहिtū·ri·ye·hi परिचारयमानोpa·ri·cā·ra·ya·mā·no नna हेट्ठापासादंheṭ·ṭhā·pā·sā·daṃ ओरोहति।o·ro·ha·ti

    So vassike pāsāde cattāro māse nippurisehi tūriyehi paricārayamāno na heṭṭhāpāsādaṁ orohati.

    He spent the four months of the rainy season in the rainy-season house, attended on only by female musicians, never descending from that house.

13. 13

    अथa·tha खोkho महानामस्सma·hā·nā·mas·sa सक्कस्सsak·kas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

    Atha kho mahānāmassa sakkassa etadahosi—

    Mahānāma thought,

14. 14

    “एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi खोkho अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पब्बजितंpab·ba·ji·taṃ अनुपब्बजन्ति।a·nu·pab·ba·jan·ti

    “etarahi kho abhiññātā abhiññātā sakyakumārā bhagavantaṁ pabbajitaṁ anupabbajanti.

    “A number of well-known young Sakyans have just followed the Buddha in going forth,

15. 15

    अम्हाकञ्चam·hā·kañ·ca पनpa·na कुलाku·lā नत्थिnat·thi कोचिko·ci अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितो।pab·ba·ji·to

    Amhākañca pana kulā natthi koci agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito.

    but no one from our household.

16. 16

    यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ वाvā पब्बजेय्यं,pab·ba·jey·yaṃ अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho वा”ति।vā

    Yannūnāhaṁ vā pabbajeyyaṁ, anuruddho vā”ti.

    Why doesn’t Anuruddha or I go forth?”

17. 17

    अथa·tha खोkho महानामोma·hā·nā·mo सक्कोsak·ko येनye·na अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho सक्कोsak·ko तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā अनुरुद्धंa·nu·rud·dhaṃ सक्कंsak·kaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho mahānāmo sakko yena anuruddho sakko tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā anuruddhaṁ sakkaṁ etadavoca—

    He then went to Anuruddha and told him what he had thought.

18. 18

    “एतरहि,e·ta·ra·hi तातtā·ta अनुरुद्ध,a·nu·rud·dha अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā अभिञ्ञाताa·bhiñ·ñā·tā सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ पब्बजितंpab·ba·ji·taṃ अनुपब्बजन्ति।a·nu·pab·ba·jan·ti

    “etarahi, tāta anuruddha, abhiññātā abhiññātā sakyakumārā bhagavantaṁ pabbajitaṁ anupabbajanti.

    (Pāli only)

19. 19

    अम्हाकञ्चam·hā·kañ·ca पनpa·na कुलाku·lā नत्थिnat·thi कोचिko·ci अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितो।pab·ba·ji·to

    Amhākañca pana kulā natthi koci agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito.

    (Pāli only)

20. 20

    तेनte·na हिhi त्वंtvaṃ वाvā पब्बज,pab·ba·ja अहंa·haṃ वाvā पब्बजिस्सामी”ति।pab·ba·jis·sā·mī

    Tena hi tvaṁ vā pabbaja, ahaṁ vā pabbajissāmī”ti.

    (Pāli only)

21. 21

    “अहंa·haṃ खोkho सुखुमालो,su·khu·mā·lo नाहंnā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुं।pab·ba·ji·tuṃ

    “Ahaṁ kho sukhumālo, nāhaṁ sakkomi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ.

    Anuruddha replied, “I’ve been brought up in great comfort. I’m not able to go forth.

22. 22

    त्वंtvaṃ पब्बजाही”ति।pab·ba·jā·hī

    Tvaṁ pabbajāhī”ti.

    You go forth.”

23. 23

    “एहिe·hi खोkho ते,te तातtā·ta अनुरुद्ध,a·nu·rud·dha घरावासत्थंgha·rā·vā·sat·thaṃ अनुसासिस्सामि।a·nu·sā·sis·sā·mi

    “Ehi kho te, tāta anuruddha, gharāvāsatthaṁ anusāsissāmi.

    “Come, then, let me teach you how to run the family business.

24. 24

    पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ खेत्तंkhet·taṃ कसापेतब्बं।ka·sā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Paṭhamaṁ khettaṁ kasāpetabbaṁ.

    First you must plow the fields,

25. 25

    कसापेत्वाka·sā·pet·vā वपापेतब्बं।va·pā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Kasāpetvā vapāpetabbaṁ.

    then sow the seeds,

26. 26

    वपापेत्वाva·pā·pet·vā उदकंu·da·kaṃ अभिनेतब्बं।a·bhi·ne·tab·baṃ

    Vapāpetvā udakaṁ abhinetabbaṁ.

    irrigate,

27. 27

    उदकंu·da·kaṃ अभिनेत्वाa·bhi·net·vā उदकंu·da·kaṃ निन्नेतब्बं।nin·ne·tab·baṃ

    Udakaṁ abhinetvā udakaṁ ninnetabbaṁ.

    and drain,

28. 28

    उदकंu·da·kaṃ निन्नेत्वाnin·net·vā निद्धापेतब्बं।nid·dhā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Udakaṁ ninnetvā niddhāpetabbaṁ.

    and then weed.

29. 29

    निद्धापेत्वाnid·dhā·pet·vā लवापेतब्बं।la·vā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Niddhāpetvā lavāpetabbaṁ.

    Next you must cut the harvest,

30. 30

    लवापेत्वाla·vā·pet·vā उब्बाहापेतब्बं।ub·bā·hā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Lavāpetvā ubbāhāpetabbaṁ.

    gather it together,

31. 31

    उब्बाहापेत्वाub·bā·hā·pet·vā पुञ्जंpuñ·jaṃ कारापेतब्बं।kā·rā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Ubbāhāpetvā puñjaṁ kārāpetabbaṁ.

    and make sheaves.

32. 32

    पुञ्जंpuñ·jaṃ कारापेत्वाkā·rā·pet·vā मद्दापेतब्बं।mad·dā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Puñjaṁ kārāpetvā maddāpetabbaṁ.

    You must then thresh it,

33. 33

    मद्दापेत्वाmad·dā·pet·vā पलालानिpa·lā·lā·ni उद्धरापेतब्बानि।ud·dha·rā·pe·tab·bā·ni

    Maddāpetvā palālāni uddharāpetabbāni.

    remove the straw

34. 34

    पलालानिpa·lā·lā·ni उद्धरापेत्वाud·dha·rā·pet·vā भुसिकाbhu·si·kā उद्धरापेतब्बा।ud·dha·rā·pe·tab·bā

    Palālāni uddharāpetvā bhusikā uddharāpetabbā.

    and husk,

35. 35

    भुसिकंbhu·si·kaṃ उद्धरापेत्वाud·dha·rā·pet·vā ओपुनापेतब्बं।o·pu·nā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Bhusikaṁ uddharāpetvā opunāpetabbaṁ.

    and then winnow it

36. 36

    ओपुनापेत्वाo·pu·nā·pet·vā अतिहरापेतब्बं।a·ti·ha·rā·pe·tab·baṃ

    Opunāpetvā atiharāpetabbaṁ.

    before you bring it into storage.

37. 37

    अतिहरापेत्वाa·ti·ha·rā·pet·vā आयतिम्पिā·ya·tim·pi वस्संvas·saṃ एवमेवe·va·me·va कातब्बं,kā·tab·baṃ आयतिम्पिā·ya·tim·pi वस्संvas·saṃ एवमेवe·va·me·va कातब्बन्”ति।kā·tab·ban

    Atiharāpetvā āyatimpi vassaṁ evameva kātabbaṁ, āyatimpi vassaṁ evameva kātabban”ti.

    And next year you must do the same, and the next.”

38. 38

    “नna कम्माkam·mā खीयन्ति?khī·yan·ti

    “Na kammā khīyanti?

    “But when does the work stop?

39. 39

    नna कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ अन्तोan·to पञ्ञायति?pañ·ñā·ya·ti

    Na kammānaṁ anto paññāyati?

    I can’t see any end to it.

40. 40

    कदाka·dā कम्माkam·mā खीयिस्सन्ति?khī·yis·san·ti

    Kadā kammā khīyissanti?

    (Pāli only)

41. 41

    कदाka·dā कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ अन्तोan·to पञ्ञायिस्सति?pañ·ñā·yis·sa·ti

    Kadā kammānaṁ anto paññāyissati?

    (Pāli only)

42. 42

    कदाka·dā मयंma·yaṃ अप्पोस्सुक्काap·pos·suk·kā पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi कामगुणेहिkā·ma·gu·ṇe·hi समप्पिताsa·map·pi·tā समङ्गीभूताsa·maṅ·gī·bhū·tā परिचारेस्सामा”ति?pa·ri·cā·res·sā·mā

    Kadā mayaṁ appossukkā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricāressāmā”ti?

    When can you enjoy yourself with worldly pleasures, free from bother?”

43. 43

    “नna हि,hi तातtā·ta अनुरुद्ध,a·nu·rud·dha कम्माkam·mā खीयन्ति।khī·yan·ti

    “Na hi, tāta anuruddha, kammā khīyanti.

    “The work doesn’t stop

44. 44

    नna कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ अन्तोan·to पञ्ञायति।pañ·ñā·ya·ti

    Na kammānaṁ anto paññāyati.

    and you won’t see any end to it.

45. 45

    अखीणेवa·khī·ṇe·va कम्मेkam·me पितरोpi·ta·ro चca पितामहाpi·tā·ma·hā चca कालङ्कता”ति।kā·laṅ·ka·tā

    Akhīṇeva kamme pitaro ca pitāmahā ca kālaṅkatā”ti.

    While the work was still unfinished, our fathers and grandfathers have all died.”

46. 46

    “तेनte·na हिhi त्वञ्ञेवtvañ·ñe·va घरावासत्थेनgha·rā·vā·sat·the·na उपजानाहि।u·pa·jā·nā·hi

    “Tena hi tvaññeva gharāvāsatthena upajānāhi.

    “Well then, you go ahead and run the family business.

47. 47

    अहंa·haṃ अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सामी”ति।pab·ba·jis·sā·mī

    Ahaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmī”ti.

    I’ll go forth into homelessness.”

48. 48

    अथa·tha खोkho अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho सक्कोsak·ko येनye·na माताmā·tā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā मातरंmā·ta·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho anuruddho sakko yena mātā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā mātaraṁ etadavoca—

    Anuruddha then went to his mother and said,

49. 49

    “इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ अम्म,am·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुं।pab·ba·ji·tuṃ

    “icchāmahaṁ, amma, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ.

    “Mom, I wish to go forth into homelessness.

50. 50

    अनुजानाहिa·nu·jā·nā·hi मंmaṃ अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

    Anujānāhi maṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

    Please allow me.”

51. 51

    एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te अनुरुद्धस्सa·nu·rud·dhas·sa सक्कस्सsak·kas·sa माताmā·tā अनुरुद्धंa·nu·rud·dhaṃ सक्कंsak·kaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Evaṁ vutte, anuruddhassa sakkassa mātā anuruddhaṁ sakkaṁ etadavoca—

    (Pāli only)

52. 52

    “तुम्हेtum·he खोkho मे,me तातtā·ta अनुरुद्ध,a·nu·rud·dha द्वेdve पुत्ताput·tā पियाpi·yā मनापाma·nā·pā अप्पटिकूला।ap·pa·ṭi·kū·lā

    “tumhe kho me, tāta anuruddha, dve puttā piyā manāpā appaṭikūlā.

    “Both of you, Anuruddha, my two sons, are dear and beloved to me.

53. 53

    मरणेनपिma·ra·ṇe·na·pi वोvo अकामकाa·kā·ma·kā विनाvi·nā भविस्सामि।bha·vis·sā·mi

    Maraṇenapi vo akāmakā vinā bhavissāmi.

    Even if you died, I would lose you against my wishes.

54. 54

    किंkiṃ पनाहंpa·nā·haṃ तुम्हेtum·he जीवन्तेjī·van·te अनुजानिस्सामिa·nu·jā·nis·sā·mi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति?pab·baj·jā·yā

    Kiṁ panāhaṁ tumhe jīvante anujānissāmi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti?

    So how can I allow you to go forth into homelessness while you’re still living?”

55. 55

    दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho …पे…pe

    Dutiyampi kho …pe…

    A second time Anuruddha asked the same question and got the same reply.

56. 56

    ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho सक्कोsak·ko मातरंmā·ta·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    tatiyampi kho anuruddho sakko mātaraṁ etadavoca—

    He then asked a third time.

57. 57

    “इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ अम्म,am·ma अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुं।pab·ba·ji·tuṃ

    “icchāmahaṁ, amma, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ.

    (Pāli only)

58. 58

    अनुजानाहिa·nu·jā·nā·hi मंmaṃ अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बज्जाया”ति।pab·baj·jā·yā

    Anujānāhi maṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajjāyā”ti.

    (Pāli only)

59. 59

    तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भद्दियोbhad·di·yo सक्यराजाsak·ya·rā·jā सक्यानंsak·yā·naṃ रज्जंraj·jaṃ कारेति।kā·re·ti

    Tena kho pana samayena bhaddiyo sakyarājā sakyānaṁ rajjaṁ kāreti.

    At that time the Sakyans were ruled by King Bhaddiya,

60. 60

    सोso चca अनुरुद्धस्सa·nu·rud·dhas·sa सक्कस्सsak·kas·sa सहायोsa·hā·yo होति।ho·ti

    So ca anuruddhassa sakkassa sahāyo hoti.

    a friend of Anuruddha’s.

61. 61

    अथa·tha खोkho अनुरुद्धस्सa·nu·rud·dhas·sa सक्कस्सsak·kas·sa माता—mā·tā

    Atha kho anuruddhassa sakkassa mātā—

    Anuruddha’s mother considered this

62. 62

    “अयंa·yaṃ खोkho भद्दियोbhad·di·yo सक्यराजाsak·ya·rā·jā सक्यानंsak·yā·naṃ रज्जंraj·jaṃ कारेति;kā·re·ti

    “ayaṁ kho bhaddiyo sakyarājā sakyānaṁ rajjaṁ kāreti;

    (Pāli only)

63. 63

    अनुरुद्धस्सa·nu·rud·dhas·sa सक्कस्सsak·kas·sa सहायो;sa·hā·yo

    anuruddhassa sakkassa sahāyo;

    (Pāli only)

64. 64

    सोso नna उस्सहतिus·sa·ha·ti अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुन्”ति—pab·ba·ji·tun

    so na ussahati agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitun”ti—

    and thought, “Bhaddiya won’t be able to go forth into homelessness.”

65. 65

    अनुरुद्धंa·nu·rud·dhaṃ सक्कंsak·kaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    anuruddhaṁ sakkaṁ etadavoca—

    And she said to Anuruddha,

66. 66

    “सचे,sa·ce तातtā·ta अनुरुद्ध,a·nu·rud·dha भद्दियोbhad·di·yo सक्यराजाsak·ya·rā·jā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजति,pab·ba·ja·ti एवंe·vaṃ त्वम्पिtvam·pi पब्बजाही”ति।pab·ba·jā·hī

    “sace, tāta anuruddha, bhaddiyo sakyarājā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, evaṁ tvampi pabbajāhī”ti.

    “If King Bhaddiya goes forth, you may go forth too.”

67. 67

    अथa·tha खोkho अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho सक्कोsak·ko येनye·na भद्दियोbhad·di·yo सक्यराजाsak·ya·rā·jā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ सक्यराजानंsak·ya·rā·jā·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho anuruddho sakko yena bhaddiyo sakyarājā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhaddiyaṁ sakyarājānaṁ etadavoca—

    Anuruddha then went to King Bhaddiya and said,

68. 68

    “ममma·ma खो,kho सम्म,sam·ma पब्बज्जाpab·baj·jā तवta·va पटिबद्धा”ति।pa·ṭi·bad·dhā

    “mama kho, samma, pabbajjā tava paṭibaddhā”ti.

    “My going forth depends on yours.”

69. 69

    “सचेsa·ce ते,te सम्म,sam·ma पब्बज्जाpab·baj·jā ममma·ma पटिबद्धाpa·ṭi·bad·dhā वाvā अप्पटिबद्धाap·pa·ṭi·bad·dhā वाvā साsā होतु,ho·tu अहंa·haṃ तया;ta·yā

    “Sace te, samma, pabbajjā mama paṭibaddhā vā appaṭibaddhā vā sā hotu, ahaṁ tayā;

    “Don’t worry about whether your going forth depends on mine or not. I’m with you.

70. 70

    यथाya·thā सुखंsu·khaṃ पब्बजाही”ति।pab·ba·jā·hī

    yathā sukhaṁ pabbajāhī”ti.

    Just go forth when you like.”

71. 71

    “एहि,e·hi सम्म,sam·ma उभोu·bho अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सामा”ति।pab·ba·jis·sā·mā

    “Ehi, samma, ubho agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmā”ti.

    “Come, let’s go forth together.”

72. 72

    “नाहं,nā·haṃ सम्म,sam·ma सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजितुन्ति।pab·ba·ji·tun·ti

    “Nāhaṁ, samma, sakkomi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitunti.

    “I’m not able to go forth.

73. 73

    यंyaṃ तेte सक्काsak·kā अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ मयाma·yā कातुं,kā·tuṃ क्याहंkyā·haṃ करिस्सामि।ka·ris·sā·mi

    Yaṁ te sakkā aññaṁ mayā kātuṁ, kyāhaṁ karissāmi.

    I’m not able to do what you do. There’s nothing I can do about it.

74. 74

    त्वंtvaṃ पब्बजाही”ति।pab·ba·jā·hī

    Tvaṁ pabbajāhī”ti.

    You go forth.”

75. 75

    “माताmā·tā खोkho मं,maṃ सम्म,sam·ma एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

    “Mātā kho maṁ, samma, evamāha—

    “My mother told me

76. 76

    ‘सचे,sa·ce तातtā·ta अनुरुद्ध,a·nu·rud·dha भद्दियोbhad·di·yo सक्यराजाsak·ya·rā·jā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजति,pab·ba·ja·ti एवंe·vaṃ त्वम्पिtvam·pi पब्बजाही’”ति।pab·ba·jā·hī

    ‘sace, tāta anuruddha, bhaddiyo sakyarājā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, evaṁ tvampi pabbajāhī’”ti.

    that I may go forth only if you go forth.

77. 77

    “भासिताbhā·si·tā खोkho पनpa·na ते,te सम्म,sam·ma एसाe·sā वाचा।vā·cā

    “Bhāsitā kho pana te, samma, esā vācā.

    And then you said,

78. 78

    सचेsa·ce ते,te सम्म,sam·ma पब्बज्जाpab·baj·jā ममma·ma पटिबद्धाpa·ṭi·bad·dhā वा,vā अप्पटिबद्धाap·pa·ṭi·bad·dhā वाvā साsā होतु,ho·tu अहंa·haṃ तया;ta·yā

    Sace te, samma, pabbajjā mama paṭibaddhā vā, appaṭibaddhā vā sā hotu, ahaṁ tayā;

    ‘Don’t worry about whether your going forth depends on mine or not. I’m with you.

79. 79

    यथाya·thā सुखंsu·khaṃ पब्बजाही”ति।pab·ba·jā·hī

    yathā sukhaṁ pabbajāhī”ti.

    Just go forth when you like.’

80. 80

    “एहि,e·hi सम्म,sam·ma उभोu·bho अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सामा”ति।pab·ba·jis·sā·mā

    “Ehi, samma, ubho agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmā”ti.

    So come, let’s go forth together.”

81. 81

    तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na मनुस्साma·nus·sā सच्चवादिनोsac·ca·vā·di·no होन्ति,hon·ti सच्चपटिञ्ञा।sac·ca·pa·ṭiñ·ñā

    Tena kho pana samayena manussā saccavādino honti, saccapaṭiññā.

    At that time people spoke the truth,

82. 82

    अथa·tha खोkho भद्दियोbhad·di·yo सक्यराजाsak·ya·rā·jā अनुरुद्धंa·nu·rud·dhaṃ सक्कंsak·kaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho bhaddiyo sakyarājā anuruddhaṁ sakkaṁ etadavoca—

    and so Bhaddiya said to Anuruddha,

83. 83

    “आगमेहि,ā·ga·me·hi सम्म,sam·ma सत्तवस्सानि।sat·ta·vas·sā·ni

    “āgamehi, samma, sattavassāni.

    “Please wait seven years.

84. 84

    सत्तन्नंsat·tan·naṃ वस्सानंvas·sā·naṃ अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na उभोu·bho अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सामा”ति।pab·ba·jis·sā·mā

    Sattannaṁ vassānaṁ accayena ubho agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmā”ti.

    Then we’ll go forth together.”

85. 85

    “अतिचिरं,a·ti·ci·raṃ सम्म,sam·ma सत्तवस्सानि।sat·ta·vas·sā·ni

    “Aticiraṁ, samma, sattavassāni.

    “That’s too long.

86. 86

    नाहंnā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi सत्तवस्सानिsat·ta·vas·sā·ni आगमेतुन्”ति।ā·ga·me·tun

    Nāhaṁ sakkomi sattavassāni āgametun”ti.

    I’m not able to wait for seven years.”

87. 87

    “आगमेहि,ā·ga·me·hi सम्म,sam·ma छवस्सानिcha·vas·sā·ni …पे…pe

    “Āgamehi, samma, chavassāni …pe…

    “Then wait six years …

88. 88

    पञ्चवस्सानिpañ·ca·vas·sā·ni …

    pañcavassāni …

    five years …

89. 89

    चत्तारिcat·tā·ri वस्सानिvas·sā·ni …

    cattāri vassāni …

    four years …

90. 90

    तीणिtī·ṇi वस्सानिvas·sā·ni …

    tīṇi vassāni …

    three years …

91. 91

    द्वेdve वस्सानिvas·sā·ni …

    dve vassāni …

    two years …

92. 92

    एकंe·kaṃ वस्सं।vas·saṃ

    ekaṁ vassaṁ.

    one year,

93. 93

    एकस्सe·kas·sa वस्सस्सvas·sas·sa अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na उभोu·bho अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सामा”ति।pab·ba·jis·sā·mā

    Ekassa vassassa accayena ubho agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmā”ti.

    and we’ll go forth together.”

94. 94

    “अतिचिरं,a·ti·ci·raṃ सम्म,sam·ma एकवस्सं।e·ka·vas·saṃ

    “Aticiraṁ, samma, ekavassaṁ.

    “That’s too long.

95. 95

    नाहंnā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi एकंe·kaṃ वस्संvas·saṃ आगमेतुन्”ति।ā·ga·me·tun

    Nāhaṁ sakkomi ekaṁ vassaṁ āgametun”ti.

    I’m not able to wait for one year.”

96. 96

    “आगमेहि,ā·ga·me·hi सम्म,sam·ma सत्तमासे।sat·ta·mā·se

    “Āgamehi, samma, sattamāse.

    “Then wait seven months,

97. 97

    सत्तन्नंsat·tan·naṃ मासानंmā·sā·naṃ अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na उभोपिu·bho·pi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सामा”ति।pab·ba·jis·sā·mā

    Sattannaṁ māsānaṁ accayena ubhopi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmā”ti.

    and we’ll go forth together.”

98. 98

    “अतिचिरं,a·ti·ci·raṃ सम्म,sam·ma सत्तमासा।sat·ta·mā·sā

    “Aticiraṁ, samma, sattamāsā.

    “That’s too long.

99. 99

    नाहंnā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se आगमेतुन्”ति।ā·ga·me·tun

    Nāhaṁ sakkomi sattamāse āgametun”ti.

    I’m not able to wait for seven months.”

100. 100

     “आगमेहि,ā·ga·me·hi सम्म,sam·ma छcha मासेmā·se …पे…pe

     “Āgamehi, samma, cha māse …pe…

     “Then wait six months …

101. 101

     पञ्चpañ·ca मासेmā·se …

     pañca māse …

     five months …

102. 102

     चत्तारोcat·tā·ro मासेmā·se …

     cattāro māse …

     four months …

103. 103

     तयोta·yo मासेmā·se …

     tayo māse …

     three months …

104. 104

     द्वेdve मासेmā·se …

     dve māse …

     two months …

105. 105

     एकंe·kaṃ मासंmā·saṃ …

     ekaṁ māsaṁ …

     one month …

106. 106

     अड्ढमासं।aḍ·ḍha·mā·saṃ

     aḍḍhamāsaṁ.

     half a month,

107. 107

     अड्ढमासस्सaḍ·ḍha·mā·sas·sa अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na उभोपिu·bho·pi अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सामा”ति।pab·ba·jis·sā·mā

     Aḍḍhamāsassa accayena ubhopi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmā”ti.

     and we’ll go forth together.”

108. 108

     “अतिचिरं,a·ti·ci·raṃ सम्म,sam·ma अड्ढमासो।aḍ·ḍha·mā·so

     “Aticiraṁ, samma, aḍḍhamāso.

     “That’s too long.

109. 109

     नाहंnā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi अड्ढमासंaḍ·ḍha·mā·saṃ आगमेतुन्”ति।ā·ga·me·tun

     Nāhaṁ sakkomi aḍḍhamāsaṁ āgametun”ti.

     I’m not able to wait for half a month.”

110. 110

     “आगमेहि,ā·ga·me·hi सम्म,sam·ma सत्ताहंsat·tā·haṃ यावाहंyā·vā·haṃ पुत्तेput·te चca भातरोbhā·ta·ro चca रज्जंraj·jaṃ निय्यादेमी”ति।niy·yā·de·mī

     “Āgamehi, samma, sattāhaṁ yāvāhaṁ putte ca bhātaro ca rajjaṁ niyyādemī”ti.

     “Then wait seven days, while I hand over the rulership to my sons and brothers.”

111. 111

     “नna चिरं,ci·raṃ सम्म,sam·ma सत्ताहो,sat·tā·ho आगमेस्सामी”ति।ā·ga·mes·sā·mī

     “Na ciraṁ, samma, sattāho, āgamessāmī”ti.

     “Seven days isn’t long. I’ll wait.”

112. 112

     अथa·tha खोkho भद्दियोbhad·di·yo चca सक्यराजाsak·ya·rā·jā अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho चca आनन्दोā·nan·do चca भगुbha·gu चca किमिलोki·mi·lo चca देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to च,ca उपालिकप्पकेनu·pā·li·kap·pa·ke·na सत्तमा,sat·ta·mā यथाya·thā पुरेpu·re चतुरङ्गिनियाca·tu·raṅ·gi·ni·yā सेनायse·nā·ya उय्यानभूमिंuy·yā·na·bhū·miṃ निय्यन्ति,niy·yan·ti एवमेवe·va·me·va चतुरङ्गिनियाca·tu·raṅ·gi·ni·yā सेनायse·nā·ya निय्यिंसु।niy·yiṃ·su

     Atha kho bhaddiyo ca sakyarājā anuruddho ca ānando ca bhagu ca kimilo ca devadatto ca, upālikappakena sattamā, yathā pure caturaṅginiyā senāya uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanti, evameva caturaṅginiyā senāya niyyiṁsu.

     Soon afterwards King Bhaddiya, Anuruddha, Ānanda, Bhagu, Kimila, and Devadatta, with the barber Upāli as the seventh, went out to the park with the fourfold army, just as they had in the past.

113. 113

     तेte दूरंdū·raṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā सेनंse·naṃ निवत्तापेत्वाni·vat·tā·pet·vā परविसयंpa·ra·vi·sa·yaṃ ओक्कमित्वाok·ka·mit·vā आभरणंā·bha·ra·ṇaṃ ओमुञ्चित्वाo·muñ·cit·vā उत्तरासङ्गेनut·ta·rā·saṅ·ge·na भण्डिकंbhaṇ·ḍi·kaṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā उपालिंu·pā·liṃ कप्पकंkap·pa·kaṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Te dūraṁ gantvā senaṁ nivattāpetvā paravisayaṁ okkamitvā ābharaṇaṁ omuñcitvā uttarāsaṅgena bhaṇḍikaṁ bandhitvā upāliṁ kappakaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     After going a good distance, they turned back the army. They then entered a foreign territory, removed their ornaments, bound them into a bundle with an upper robe, and said to Upāli,

114. 114

     “हन्द,han·da भणेbha·ṇe उपालि,u·pā·li निवत्तस्सु;ni·vat·tas·su

     “handa, bhaṇe upāli, nivattassu;

     “Now turn back, Upāli.

115. 115

     अलंa·laṃ तेte एत्तकंet·ta·kaṃ जीविकाया”ति।jī·vi·kā·yā

     alaṁ te ettakaṁ jīvikāyā”ti.

     This is enough for you to live on.”

116. 116

     अथa·tha खोkho उपालिस्सu·pā·lis·sa कप्पकस्सkap·pa·kas·sa निवत्तन्तस्सni·vat·tan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho upālissa kappakassa nivattantassa etadahosi—

     As Upāli was returning, he thought,

117. 117

     “चण्डाcaṇ·ḍā खोkho साकिया;sā·ki·yā

     “caṇḍā kho sākiyā;

     “The Sakyans are temperamental.

118. 118

     इमिनाi·mi·nā कुमाराku·mā·rā निप्पातितातिnip·pā·ti·tā·ti घातापेय्युम्पिghā·tā·pey·yum·pi मं।maṃ

     iminā kumārā nippātitāti ghātāpeyyumpi maṁ.

     They may think that I’m responsible for the departure of these young men and have me executed.

119. 119

     इमेi·me हिhi नामnā·ma सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सन्ति।pab·ba·jis·san·ti

     Ime hi nāma sakyakumārā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissanti.

     Now, if these young Sakyans are going forth into homelessness,

120. 120

     किमङ्गंki·maṅ·gaṃ पनाहन्”ति।pa·nā·han

     Kimaṅgaṁ panāhan”ti.

     why shouldn’t I?”

121. 121

     भण्डिकंbhaṇ·ḍi·kaṃ मुञ्चित्वाmuñ·cit·vā तंtaṃ भण्डंbhaṇ·ḍaṃ रुक्खेruk·khe आलग्गेत्वाā·lag·get·vā “योyo पस्सति,pas·sa·ti दिन्नंयेवdin·naṃ·ye·va हरतू”तिha·ra·tū वत्वाvat·vā येनye·na तेte सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

     Bhaṇḍikaṁ muñcitvā taṁ bhaṇḍaṁ rukkhe ālaggetvā “yo passati, dinnaṁyeva haratū”ti vatvā yena te sakyakumārā tenupasaṅkami.

     Undoing the bundle, he hung the goods from a tree, saying, “This is given to whoever sees it. They may take it away.” And he returned to the young Sakyans.

122. 122

     अद्दसासुंad·da·sā·suṃ खोkho तेte सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā उपालिंu·pā·liṃ कप्पकंkap·pa·kaṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं।ā·gac·chan·taṃ

     Addasāsuṁ kho te sakyakumārā upāliṁ kappakaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ.

     Seeing Upāli coming,

123. 123

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na उपालिंu·pā·liṃ कप्पकंkap·pa·kaṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Disvāna upāliṁ kappakaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     they said to him,

124. 124

     “किस्स,kis·sa भणेbha·ṇe उपालि,u·pā·li निवत्तेसी”ति?ni·vat·te·sī

     “kissa, bhaṇe upāli, nivattesī”ti?

     “Why are you coming back, Upāli?”

125. 125

     “इधi·dha मे,me अय्यपुत्ता,ay·ya·put·tā निवत्तन्तस्सni·vat·tan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     “Idha me, ayyaputtā, nivattantassa etadahosi—

     And he told what he had done.

126. 126

     ‘चण्डाcaṇ·ḍā खोkho साकिया;sā·ki·yā

     ‘caṇḍā kho sākiyā;

     (Pāli only)

127. 127

     इमिनाi·mi·nā कुमाराku·mā·rā निप्पातितातिnip·pā·ti·tā·ti घातापेय्युम्पिghā·tā·pey·yum·pi मं।maṃ

     iminā kumārā nippātitāti ghātāpeyyumpi maṁ.

     (Pāli only)

128. 128

     इमेi·me हिhi नामnā·ma सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā अगारस्माa·gā·ras·mā अनगारियंa·na·gā·ri·yaṃ पब्बजिस्सन्ति।pab·ba·jis·san·ti

     Ime hi nāma sakyakumārā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissanti.

     (Pāli only)

129. 129

     किमङ्गंki·maṅ·gaṃ पनाहन्’ति।pa·nā·han

     Kimaṅgaṁ panāhan’ti.

     (Pāli only)

130. 130

     सोso खोkho अहं,a·haṃ अय्यपुत्ता,ay·ya·put·tā भण्डिकंbhaṇ·ḍi·kaṃ मुञ्चित्वाmuñ·cit·vā तंtaṃ भण्डंbhaṇ·ḍaṃ रुक्खेruk·khe आलग्गेत्वाā·lag·get·vā ‘योyo पस्सति,pas·sa·ti दिन्नञ्ञेवdin·nañ·ñe·va हरतू’तिha·ra·tū वत्वाvat·vā ततोम्हिta·tom·hi पटिनिवत्तो”ति।pa·ṭi·ni·vat·to

     So kho ahaṁ, ayyaputtā, bhaṇḍikaṁ muñcitvā taṁ bhaṇḍaṁ rukkhe ālaggetvā ‘yo passati, dinnaññeva haratū’ti vatvā tatomhi paṭinivatto”ti.

     (Pāli only)

131. 131

     “सुट्ठु,suṭ·ṭhu भणेbha·ṇe उपालि,u·pā·li अकासिa·kā·si यम्पिyam·pi नna निवत्तो।ni·vat·to

     “Suṭṭhu, bhaṇe upāli, akāsi yampi na nivatto.

     “You have done the right thing.

132. 132

     चण्डाcaṇ·ḍā खोkho साकिया;sā·ki·yā

     Caṇḍā kho sākiyā;

     The Sakyans are indeed temperamental.

133. 133

     इमिनाi·mi·nā कुमाराku·mā·rā निप्पातितातिnip·pā·ti·tā·ti घातापेय्युम्पिghā·tā·pey·yum·pi तन्”ति।tan

     iminā kumārā nippātitāti ghātāpeyyumpi tan”ti.

     They might well have held you responsible for our departure and have had you executed.”

134. 134

     अथa·tha खोkho सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā उपालिंu·pā·liṃ कप्पकंkap·pa·kaṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Atha kho sakyakumārā upāliṁ kappakaṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     The young Sakyans then took Upāli with them and went to the Buddha, where they bowed, sat down,

135. 135

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho तेte सक्यकुमाराsak·ya·ku·mā·rā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te sakyakumārā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and said,

136. 136

     “मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te साकियाsā·ki·yā नामnā·ma मानस्सिनो।mā·nas·si·no

     “mayaṁ, bhante, sākiyā nāma mānassino.

     “Sir, we Sakyans are proud.

137. 137

     अयं,a·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te उपालिu·pā·li कप्पकोkap·pa·ko अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ परिचारको।pa·ri·cā·ra·ko

     Ayaṁ, bhante, upāli kappako amhākaṁ dīgharattaṁ paricārako.

     This barber Upāli has been serving us for a long time.

138. 138

     इमंi·maṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ पब्बाजेतु।pab·bā·je·tu

     Imaṁ bhagavā paṭhamaṁ pabbājetu.

     Please let him go forth first.

139. 139

     इमस्सi·mas·sa मयंma·yaṃ अभिवादनपच्चुट्ठानअञ्जलिकम्मसामीचिकम्मंa·bhi·vā·da·na·pac·cuṭ·ṭhā·na·añ·ja·li·kam·ma·sā·mī·ci·kam·maṃ करिस्साम।ka·ris·sā·ma

     Imassa mayaṁ abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṁ karissāma.

     We’ll then bow down to him, rise up for him, raise our joined palms to him, and do acts of respect toward him.

140. 140

     एवंe·vaṃ अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ साकियानंsā·ki·yā·naṃ साकियमानोsā·ki·ya·mā·no निम्मानायिस्सती”ति।nim·mā·nā·yis·sa·tī

     Evaṁ amhākaṁ sākiyānaṁ sākiyamāno nimmānāyissatī”ti.

     In this way our Sakyan pride will be humbled.”

141. 141

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उपालिंu·pā·liṃ कप्पकंkap·pa·kaṃ पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ पब्बाजेसि,pab·bā·je·si पच्छाpac·chā तेte सक्यकुमारे।sak·ya·ku·mā·re

     Atha kho bhagavā upāliṁ kappakaṁ paṭhamaṁ pabbājesi, pacchā te sakyakumāre.

     And the Buddha had Upāli go forth first, and afterwards the young Sakyans.

142. 142

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā भद्दियोbhad·di·yo तेनेवte·ne·va अन्तरवस्सेनan·ta·ra·vas·se·na तिस्सोtis·so विज्जाvij·jā सच्छाकासि।sac·chā·kā·si

     Atha kho āyasmā bhaddiyo teneva antaravassena tisso vijjā sacchākāsi.

     During that very rainy season Venerable Bhaddiya realized the three insights,

143. 143

     आयस्माā·yas·mā अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho दिब्बचक्खुंdib·ba·cak·khuṃ उप्पादेसि।up·pā·de·si

     Āyasmā anuruddho dibbacakkhuṁ uppādesi.

     Venerable Anuruddha obtained clairvoyance,

144. 144

     आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do सोतापत्तिफलंso·tā·pat·ti·pha·laṃ सच्छाकासि।sac·chā·kā·si

     Āyasmā ānando sotāpattiphalaṁ sacchākāsi.

     Venerable Ānanda realized streamentry,

145. 145

     देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to पोथुज्जनिकंpo·thuj·ja·ni·kaṃ इद्धिंid·dhiṃ अभिनिप्फादेसि।a·bhi·nip·phā·de·si

     Devadatto pothujjanikaṁ iddhiṁ abhinipphādesi.

     whereas Devadatta obtained supernormal powers, but no stage of awakening.

146. 146

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā भद्दियोbhad·di·yo अरञ्ञगतोपिa·rañ·ña·ga·to·pi रुक्खमूलगतोपिruk·kha·mū·la·ga·to·pi सुञ्ञागारगतोपिsuñ·ñā·gā·ra·ga·to·pi अभिक्खणंa·bhik·kha·ṇaṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā bhaddiyo araññagatopi rukkhamūlagatopi suññāgāragatopi abhikkhaṇaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     Then, when Bhaddiya was in the wilderness, at the foot of a tree, or in an empty dwelling, he frequently uttered this heartfelt exclamation:

147. 147

     “अहोa·ho सुखं,su·khaṃ अहोa·ho सुखन्”ति।su·khan

     “aho sukhaṁ, aho sukhan”ti.

     “Oh, what happiness! Oh, what happiness!”

148. 148

     अथa·tha खोkho सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     A number of monks went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

149. 149

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and told him what was happening,

150. 150

     “आयस्मा,ā·yas·mā भन्ते,bhan·te भद्दियोbhad·di·yo अरञ्ञगतोपिa·rañ·ña·ga·to·pi रुक्खमूलगतोपिruk·kha·mū·la·ga·to·pi सुञ्ञागारगतोपिsuñ·ñā·gā·ra·ga·to·pi अभिक्खणंa·bhik·kha·ṇaṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     “āyasmā, bhante, bhaddiyo araññagatopi rukkhamūlagatopi suññāgāragatopi abhikkhaṇaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     (Pāli only)

151. 151

     ‘अहोa·ho सुखं,su·khaṃ अहोa·ho सुखन्’ति।su·khan

     ‘aho sukhaṁ, aho sukhan’ti.

     (Pāli only)

152. 152

     निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te आयस्माā·yas·mā भद्दियोbhad·di·yo अनभिरतोवa·na·bhi·ra·to·va ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरति।ca·ra·ti

     Nissaṁsayaṁ kho, bhante, āyasmā bhaddiyo anabhiratova brahmacariyaṁ carati.

     adding, “No doubt Bhaddiya is dissatisfied with the spiritual life.

153. 153

     तंयेवtaṃ·ye·va वाvā पुरिमंpu·ri·maṃ रज्जसुखंraj·ja·su·khaṃ समनुस्सरन्तोsa·ma·nus·sa·ran·to अरञ्ञगतोपिa·rañ·ña·ga·to·pi रुक्खमूलगतोपिruk·kha·mū·la·ga·to·pi सुञ्ञागारगतोपिsuñ·ñā·gā·ra·ga·to·pi अभिक्खणंa·bhik·kha·ṇaṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     Taṁyeva vā purimaṁ rajjasukhaṁ samanussaranto araññagatopi rukkhamūlagatopi suññāgāragatopi abhikkhaṇaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     He’s saying this because he’s recalling his former happiness as a king.”

154. 154

     ‘अहोa·ho सुखं,su·khaṃ अहोa·ho सुखन्’”ति।su·khan

     ‘aho sukhaṁ, aho sukhan’”ti.

     (Pāli only)

155. 155

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā aññataraṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantesi—

     The Buddha addressed a certain monk:

156. 156

     “एहिe·hi त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu ममma·ma वचनेनva·ca·ne·na भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ आमन्तेहि—ā·man·te·hi

     “ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena bhaddiyaṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantehi—

     “Go, monk, and in my name say to Bhaddiya,

157. 157

     ‘सत्थाsat·thā तं,taṃ आवुसोā·vu·so भद्दिय,bhad·di·ya आमन्तेती’”ति।ā·man·te·tī

     ‘satthā taṁ, āvuso bhaddiya, āmantetī’”ti.

     ‘Bhaddiya, the Teacher is calling you.’”

158. 158

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā भद्दियोbhad·di·yo तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissutvā yenāyasmā bhaddiyo tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ bhaddiyaṁ etadavoca—

     Saying, “Yes, sir,” he did just that.

159. 159

     “सत्थाsat·thā तं,taṃ आवुसोā·vu·so भद्दिय,bhad·di·ya आमन्तेती”ति।ā·man·te·tī

     “satthā taṁ, āvuso bhaddiya, āmantetī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

160. 160

     “एवमावुसो”तिe·va·mā·vu·so खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā भद्दियोbhad·di·yo तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā bhaddiyo tassa bhikkhuno paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Bhaddiya consented. He then went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down.

161. 161

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ भद्दियंbhad·di·yaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ bhaddiyaṁ bhagavā etadavoca—

     The Buddha said to him,

162. 162

     “सच्चंsac·caṃ किरki·ra त्वं,tvaṃ भद्दिय,bhad·di·ya अरञ्ञगतोपिa·rañ·ña·ga·to·pi रुक्खमूलगतोपिruk·kha·mū·la·ga·to·pi सुञ्ञागारगतोपिsuñ·ñā·gā·ra·ga·to·pi अभिक्खणंa·bhik·kha·ṇaṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     “saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, bhaddiya, araññagatopi rukkhamūlagatopi suññāgāragatopi abhikkhaṇaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     “Is it true, Bhaddiya, that when you’re in the wilderness, at the foot of a tree, or in an empty dwelling, you frequently utter this heartfelt exclamation:

163. 163

     ‘अहोa·ho सुखं,su·khaṃ अहोa·ho सुखन्’”ति?su·khan

     ‘aho sukhaṁ, aho sukhan’”ti?

     ‘Oh, what happiness! Oh, what happiness!’?”

164. 164

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”ति।bhan·te

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti.

     “Yes, venerable sir.”

165. 165

     “किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ भद्दिय,bhad·di·ya अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानोsam·pas·sa·mā·no अरञ्ञगतोपिa·rañ·ña·ga·to·pi रुक्खमूलगतोपिruk·kha·mū·la·ga·to·pi सुञ्ञागारगतोपिsuñ·ñā·gā·ra·ga·to·pi अभिक्खणंa·bhik·kha·ṇaṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, bhaddiya, atthavasaṁ sampassamāno araññagatopi rukkhamūlagatopi suññāgāragatopi abhikkhaṇaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     “But why do you say this?”

166. 166

     ‘अहोa·ho सुखं,su·khaṃ अहोa·ho सुखन्’”ति?su·khan

     ‘aho sukhaṁ, aho sukhan’”ti?

     (Pāli only)

167. 167

     “पुब्बेpub·be मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te रञ्ञोrañ·ño सतोपिsa·to·pi अन्तोपिan·to·pi अन्तेपुरेan·te·pu·re रक्खाrak·khā सुसंविहिताsu·saṃ·vi·hi·tā होति,ho·ti बहिपिba·hi·pi अन्तेपुरेan·te·pu·re रक्खाrak·khā सुसंविहिताsu·saṃ·vi·hi·tā होति,ho·ti अन्तोपिan·to·pi नगरेna·ga·re रक्खाrak·khā सुसंविहिताsu·saṃ·vi·hi·tā होति,ho·ti बहिपिba·hi·pi नगरेna·ga·re रक्खाrak·khā सुसंविहिताsu·saṃ·vi·hi·tā होति,ho·ti अन्तोपिan·to·pi जनपदेja·na·pa·de रक्खाrak·khā सुसंविहिताsu·saṃ·vi·hi·tā होति,ho·ti बहिपिba·hi·pi जनपदेja·na·pa·de रक्खाrak·khā सुसंविहिताsu·saṃ·vi·hi·tā होति।ho·ti

     “Pubbe me, bhante, rañño satopi antopi antepure rakkhā susaṁvihitā hoti, bahipi antepure rakkhā susaṁvihitā hoti, antopi nagare rakkhā susaṁvihitā hoti, bahipi nagare rakkhā susaṁvihitā hoti, antopi janapade rakkhā susaṁvihitā hoti, bahipi janapade rakkhā susaṁvihitā hoti.

     “In the past, sir, when I was a king, I was well protected within and outside the royal compound, within and outside of town, and within and outside the country.

168. 168

     सोso खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te एवंe·vaṃ रक्खितोपिrak·khi·to·pi गोपितोपिgo·pi·to·pi सन्तोsan·to भीतोbhī·to उब्बिग्गोub·big·go उस्सङ्कीus·saṅ·kī उत्रस्तोut·ras·to विहरामि।vi·ha·rā·mi

     So kho ahaṁ, bhante, evaṁ rakkhitopi gopitopi santo bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto viharāmi.

     But although I was protected and guarded in this way, I was fearful, agitated, and distrustful.

169. 169

     एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi खोkho पनpa·na अहंa·haṃ एको,e·ko भन्ते,bhan·te अरञ्ञगतोपिa·rañ·ña·ga·to·pi रुक्खमूलगतोपिruk·kha·mū·la·ga·to·pi सुञ्ञागारगतोपिsuñ·ñā·gā·ra·ga·to·pi अभीतोa·bhī·to अनुब्बिग्गोa·nub·big·go अनुस्सङ्कीa·nus·saṅ·kī अनुत्रस्तोa·nut·ras·to अप्पोस्सुक्कोap·pos·suk·ko पन्नलोमोpan·na·lo·mo परदत्तवुत्तोpa·ra·dat·ta·vut·to मिगभूतेनmi·ga·bhū·te·na चेतसाce·ta·sā विहरामीति।vi·ha·rā·mī·ti

     Etarahi kho pana ahaṁ eko, bhante, araññagatopi rukkhamūlagatopi suññāgāragatopi abhīto anubbiggo anussaṅkī anutrasto appossukko pannalomo paradattavutto migabhūtena cetasā viharāmīti.

     But now, sir, when I’m in the wilderness, at the foot of a tree, or in an empty dwelling, I’m free from fear, agitation, and distrust. I’m free from bother, relaxed, living on what’s given by others, with a mind as free as a wild animal.

170. 170

     इमंi·maṃ खोkho अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानोsam·pas·sa·mā·no अरञ्ञगतोपिa·rañ·ña·ga·to·pi रुक्खमूलगतोपिruk·kha·mū·la·ga·to·pi सुञ्ञागारगतोपिsuñ·ñā·gā·ra·ga·to·pi अभिक्खणंa·bhik·kha·ṇaṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेमि—u·dā·ne·mi

     Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, atthavasaṁ sampassamāno araññagatopi rukkhamūlagatopi suññāgāragatopi abhikkhaṇaṁ udānaṁ udānemi—

     That’s why I say this.”

171. 171

     ‘अहोa·ho सुखं,su·khaṃ अहोa·ho सुखन्’”ति।su·khan

     ‘aho sukhaṁ, aho sukhan’”ti.

     (Pāli only)

172. 172

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā तायंtā·yaṃ वेलायंve·lā·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     Seeing the significance of this, on that occasion the Buddha uttered a heartfelt exclamation:

173. 173

     “यस्सन्तरतोyas·san·ta·ra·to नna सन्तिsan·ti कोपा,ko·pā

     “Yassantarato na santi kopā,

     “They who have no anger within,

174. 174

     इतिi·ti भवाभवतञ्चbha·vā·bha·va·tañ·ca वीतिवत्तो;vī·ti·vat·to

     Iti bhavābhavatañca vītivatto;

     Gone beyond any kind of existence,

175. 175

     तंtaṃ विगतभयंvi·ga·ta·bha·yaṃ सुखिंsu·khiṃ असोकं,a·so·kaṃ

     Taṁ vigatabhayaṁ sukhiṁ asokaṁ,

     Happy, free from fear and sorrow—

176. 176

     देवाde·vā नानुभवन्तिnā·nu·bha·van·ti दस्सनाया”ति।das·sa·nā·yā

     Devā nānubhavanti dassanāyā”ti.

     Even the gods are unable to see them.”

177. 177

     1।2। देवदत्तवत्थुde·va·dat·ta·vat·thu

     1.2. Devadattavatthu

     2. The account of Devadatta

178. 178

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपियायंa·nu·pi·yā·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na कोसम्बीko·sam·bī तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā anupiyāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena kosambī tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     When the Buddha had stayed at Anupiyā for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Kosambī.

179. 179

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na कोसम्बीko·sam·bī तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena kosambī tadavasari.

     When he eventually arrived,

180. 180

     तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā कोसम्बियंko·sam·bi·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti घोसितारामे।gho·si·tā·rā·me

     Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā kosambiyaṁ viharati ghositārāme.

     he stayed in Ghosita’s Monastery.

181. 181

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

     Atha kho devadattassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

     Then, while reflecting in private, Devadatta thought,

182. 182

     “कंkaṃ नुnu खोkho अहंa·haṃ पसादेय्यं,pa·sā·dey·yaṃ यस्मिंyas·miṃ मेme पसन्नेpa·san·ne बहुलाभसक्कारोba·hu·lā·bha·sak·kā·ro उप्पज्जेय्या”ति?up·paj·jey·yā

     “kaṁ nu kho ahaṁ pasādeyyaṁ, yasmiṁ me pasanne bahulābhasakkāro uppajjeyyā”ti?

     “Who might I inspire to have confidence in me, so that I’d get much material support and honor?”

183. 183

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho devadattassa etadahosi—

     And it occurred to him,

184. 184

     “अयंa·yaṃ खोkho अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro तरुणोta·ru·ṇo चेवce·va आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ भद्दोbhad·do च।ca

     “ayaṁ kho ajātasattu kumāro taruṇo ceva āyatiṁ bhaddo ca.

     “Prince Ajātasattu is young and has a bright future.

185. 185

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ अजातसत्तुंa·jā·ta·sat·tuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ पसादेय्यं।pa·sā·dey·yaṃ

     Yannūnāhaṁ ajātasattuṁ kumāraṁ pasādeyyaṁ.

     Why don’t I inspire him to have confidence in me?

186. 186

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ मेme पसन्नेpa·san·ne बहुलाभसक्कारोba·hu·lā·bha·sak·kā·ro उप्पज्जिस्सती”ति।up·paj·jis·sa·tī

     Tasmiṁ me pasanne bahulābhasakkāro uppajjissatī”ti.

     Then I’ll get much material support and honor.”

187. 187

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ संसामेत्वाsaṃ·sā·met·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तेनte·na पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho devadatto senāsanaṁ saṁsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena rājagahaṁ tena pakkāmi.

     He put his dwelling in order, took his bowl and robes, and left for Rājagaha,

188. 188

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Anupubbena yena rājagahaṁ tadavasari.

     where he eventually arrived.

189. 189

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सकवण्णंsa·ka·vaṇ·ṇaṃ पटिसंहरित्वाpa·ṭi·saṃ·ha·rit·vā कुमारकवण्णंku·mā·ra·ka·vaṇ·ṇaṃ अभिनिम्मिनित्वाa·bhi·nim·mi·nit·vā अहिमेखलिकायa·hi·me·kha·li·kā·ya अजातसत्तुस्सa·jā·ta·sat·tus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa उच्छङ्गेuc·chaṅ·ge पातुरहोसि।pā·tu·ra·ho·si

     Atha kho devadatto sakavaṇṇaṁ paṭisaṁharitvā kumārakavaṇṇaṁ abhinimminitvā ahimekhalikāya ajātasattussa kumārassa ucchaṅge pāturahosi.

     He then transformed himself into a boy wearing a snake as a belt and appeared on Prince Ajātasattu’s lap.

190. 190

     अथa·tha खोkho अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro भीतोbhī·to अहोसि,a·ho·si उब्बिग्गोub·big·go उस्सङ्कीus·saṅ·kī उत्रस्तो।ut·ras·to

     Atha kho ajātasattu kumāro bhīto ahosi, ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto.

     When Ajātasattu became fearful and agitated,

191. 191

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to अजातसत्तुंa·jā·ta·sat·tuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho devadatto ajātasattuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     Devadatta said to him,

192. 192

     “भायसिbhā·ya·si मंmaṃ त्वं,tvaṃ कुमारा”ति?ku·mā·rā

     “bhāyasi maṁ tvaṁ, kumārā”ti?

     “Are you afraid of me, prince?”

193. 193

     “आमā·ma भायामि।bhā·yā·mi

     “Āma bhāyāmi.

     “I am.

194. 194

     कोसिko·si त्वन्”ति?tvan

     Kosi tvan”ti?

     Who are you?”

195. 195

     “अहंa·haṃ देवदत्तो”ति।de·va·dat·to

     “Ahaṁ devadatto”ti.

     “I’m Devadatta.”

196. 196

     “सचेsa·ce खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अय्योay·yo देवदत्तो,de·va·dat·to इङ्घiṅ·gha सकेनेवsa·ke·ne·va वण्णेनvaṇ·ṇe·na पातुभवस्सू”ति।pā·tu·bha·vas·sū

     “Sace kho tvaṁ, bhante, ayyo devadatto, iṅgha sakeneva vaṇṇena pātubhavassū”ti.

     “If you’re Venerable Devadatta, please appear in your own form.”

197. 197

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to कुमारकवण्णंku·mā·ra·ka·vaṇ·ṇaṃ पटिसंहरित्वाpa·ṭi·saṃ·ha·rit·vā सङ्घाटिपत्तचीवरधरोsaṅ·ghā·ṭi·pat·ta·cī·va·ra·dha·ro अजातसत्तुस्सa·jā·ta·sat·tus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa पुरतोpu·ra·to अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho devadatto kumārakavaṇṇaṁ paṭisaṁharitvā saṅghāṭipattacīvaradharo ajātasattussa kumārassa purato aṭṭhāsi.

     Devadatta abandoned the form of a boy and stood in front of Ajātasattu, wearing his robes and carrying his bowl.

198. 198

     अथa·tha खोkho अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa इमिनाi·mi·nā इद्धिपाटिहारियेनid·dhi·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·ye·na अभिप्पसन्नोa·bhip·pa·san·no पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi रथसतेहिra·tha·sa·te·hi सायंsā·yaṃ पातंpā·taṃ उपट्ठानंu·paṭ·ṭhā·naṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti पञ्चpañ·ca चca थालिपाकसतानिthā·li·pā·ka·sa·tā·ni भत्ताभिहारोbhat·tā·bhi·hā·ro अभिहरीयति।a·bhi·ha·rī·ya·ti

     Atha kho ajātasattu kumāro devadattassa iminā iddhipāṭihāriyena abhippasanno pañcahi rathasatehi sāyaṁ pātaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ gacchati, pañca ca thālipākasatāni bhattābhihāro abhiharīyati.

     By means of this wonder Devadatta was able to inspire Ajātasattu to have confidence in him. Ajātasattu then attended on him morning and evening, with five hundred carriages and a meal offering of five hundred dishes of food.

199. 199

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकेनlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ke·na अभिभूतस्सa·bhi·bhū·tas·sa परियादिन्नचित्तस्सpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·tas·sa एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ इच्छागतंic·chā·ga·taṃ उप्पज्जि—up·paj·ji

     Atha kho devadattassa lābhasakkārasilokena abhibhūtassa pariyādinnacittassa evarūpaṁ icchāgataṁ uppajji—

     Overcome by material support, honor, and praise,

200. 200

     “अहंa·haṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ परिहरिस्सामी”ति।pa·ri·ha·ris·sā·mī

     “ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmī”ti.

     Devadatta started desiring to lead the Sangha of monks.

201. 201

     सहsa·ha चित्तुप्पादावcit·tup·pā·dā·va देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to तस्साtas·sā इद्धियाid·dhi·yā परिहायि।pa·ri·hā·yi

     Saha cittuppādāva devadatto tassā iddhiyā parihāyi.

     But with the appearance of that thought, his supernormal powers disappeared.

202. 202

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na ककुधोka·ku·dho नामnā·ma कोळियपुत्तो,ko·ḷi·ya·put·to आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to महामोग्गल्लानस्सma·hā·mog·gal·lā·nas·sa उपट्ठाको,u·paṭ·ṭhā·ko अधुनाa·dhu·nā कालङ्कतोkā·laṅ·ka·to अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ मनोमयंma·no·ma·yaṃ कायंkā·yaṃ उपपन्नो।u·pa·pan·no

     Tena kho pana samayena kakudho nāma koḷiyaputto, āyasmato mahāmoggallānassa upaṭṭhāko, adhunā kālaṅkato aññataraṁ manomayaṁ kāyaṁ upapanno.

     At that time Kakudha the Koḷiyan, the attendant to Venerable Mahāmoggallāna, had recently died and been reborn in a mind-made body.

203. 203

     तस्सtas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po अत्तभावप्पटिलाभोat·ta·bhā·vap·pa·ṭi·lā·bho होति—ho·ti

     Tassa evarūpo attabhāvappaṭilābho hoti—

     He had acquired a body

204. 204

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma द्वेdve वाvā तीणिtī·ṇi वाvā मागधकानिmā·ga·dha·kā·ni गामक्खेत्तानि।gā·mak·khet·tā·ni

     seyyathāpi nāma dve vā tīṇi vā māgadhakāni gāmakkhettāni.

     two or three times the size of the fields of a Magadhan village.

205. 205

     सोso तेनte·na अत्तभावप्पटिलाभेनat·ta·bhā·vap·pa·ṭi·lā·bhe·na नेवne·va अत्तानंat·tā·naṃ नna परंpa·raṃ ब्याबाधेति।byā·bā·dhe·ti

     So tena attabhāvappaṭilābhena neva attānaṁ na paraṁ byābādheti.

     Yet he harmed neither himself nor others with that body.

206. 206

     अथa·tha खोkho ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तोde·va·put·to येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ महामोग्गल्लानंma·hā·mog·gal·lā·naṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho kakudho devaputto yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

     Soon afterwards the god Kakudha approached Mahāmoggallāna, bowed down,

207. 207

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खोkho ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तोde·va·put·to आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ महामोग्गल्लानंma·hā·mog·gal·lā·naṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho kakudho devaputto āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him

208. 208

     “देवदत्तस्स,de·va·dat·tas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te लाभसक्कारसिलोकेनlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ke·na अभिभूतस्सa·bhi·bhū·tas·sa परियादिन्नचित्तस्सpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·tas·sa एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ इच्छागतंic·chā·ga·taṃ उप्पज्जि—up·paj·ji

     “devadattassa, bhante, lābhasakkārasilokena abhibhūtassa pariyādinnacittassa evarūpaṁ icchāgataṁ uppajji—

     about Devadatta’s desire

209. 209

     ‘अहंa·haṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ परिहरिस्सामी’ति।pa·ri·ha·ris·sā·mī

     ‘ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

210. 210

     सहsa·ha चित्तुप्पादाव,cit·tup·pā·dā·va भन्ते,bhan·te देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to तस्साtas·sā इद्धियाid·dhi·yā परिहीनो”ति।pa·ri·hī·no

     Saha cittuppādāva, bhante, devadatto tassā iddhiyā parihīno”ti.

     and the disappearance of his supernormal powers.

211. 211

     इदमवोचi·da·ma·vo·ca ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तो।de·va·put·to

     Idamavoca kakudho devaputto.

     (Pāli only)

212. 212

     इदंi·daṃ वत्वाvat·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ महामोग्गल्लानंma·hā·mog·gal·lā·naṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā तत्थेवtat·the·va अन्तरधायि।an·ta·ra·dhā·yi

     Idaṁ vatvā āyasmantaṁ mahāmoggallānaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tattheva antaradhāyi.

     He then bowed down, circumambulated Mahāmoggallāna with his right side toward him, and disappeared right there.

213. 213

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Mahāmoggallāna then went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

214. 214

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him all that had happened.

215. 215

     “ककुधोka·ku·dho नाम,nā·ma भन्ते,bhan·te कोळियपुत्तोko·ḷi·ya·put·to ममma·ma उपट्ठाकोu·paṭ·ṭhā·ko अधुनाa·dhu·nā कालङ्कतोkā·laṅ·ka·to अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ मनोमयंma·no·ma·yaṃ कायंkā·yaṃ उपपन्नो।u·pa·pan·no

     “kakudho nāma, bhante, koḷiyaputto mama upaṭṭhāko adhunā kālaṅkato aññataraṁ manomayaṁ kāyaṁ upapanno.

     (Pāli only)

216. 216

     तस्सtas·sa एवरूपोe·va·rū·po अत्तभावप्पटिलाभो—at·ta·bhā·vap·pa·ṭi·lā·bho

     Tassa evarūpo attabhāvappaṭilābho—

     (Pāli only)

217. 217

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma द्वेdve वाvā तीणिtī·ṇi वाvā मागधकानिmā·ga·dha·kā·ni गामक्खेत्तानि।gā·mak·khet·tā·ni

     seyyathāpi nāma dve vā tīṇi vā māgadhakāni gāmakkhettāni.

     (Pāli only)

218. 218

     सोso तेनte·na अत्तभावप्पटिलाभेनat·ta·bhā·vap·pa·ṭi·lā·bhe·na नेवne·va अत्तानंat·tā·naṃ नna परंpa·raṃ ब्याबाधेति।byā·bā·dhe·ti

     So tena attabhāvappaṭilābhena neva attānaṁ na paraṁ byābādheti.

     (Pāli only)

219. 219

     अथa·tha खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तोde·va·put·to येनाहंye·nā·haṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā मंmaṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho, bhante, kakudho devaputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

     (Pāli only)

220. 220

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितोṭhi·to खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तोde·va·put·to मंmaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho, bhante, kakudho devaputto maṁ etadavoca—

     (Pāli only)

221. 221

     ‘देवदत्तस्स,de·va·dat·tas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te लाभसक्कारसिलोकेनlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ke·na अभिभूतस्सa·bhi·bhū·tas·sa परियादिन्नचित्तस्सpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·tas·sa एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ इच्छागतंic·chā·ga·taṃ उप्पज्जि—up·paj·ji

     ‘devadattassa, bhante, lābhasakkārasilokena abhibhūtassa pariyādinnacittassa evarūpaṁ icchāgataṁ uppajji—

     (Pāli only)

222. 222

     अहंa·haṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ परिहरिस्सामीति।pa·ri·ha·ris·sā·mī·ti

     ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmīti.

     (Pāli only)

223. 223

     सहsa·ha चित्तुप्पादाव,cit·tup·pā·dā·va भन्ते,bhan·te देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to तस्साtas·sā इद्धियाid·dhi·yā परिहीनो’ति।pa·ri·hī·no

     Saha cittuppādāva, bhante, devadatto tassā iddhiyā parihīno’ti.

     (Pāli only)

224. 224

     इदमवोच,i·da·ma·vo·ca भन्ते,bhan·te ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तो।de·va·put·to

     Idamavoca, bhante, kakudho devaputto.

     (Pāli only)

225. 225

     इदंi·daṃ वत्वाvat·vā मंmaṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā तत्थेवtat·the·va अन्तरधायी”ति।an·ta·ra·dhā·yī

     Idaṁ vatvā maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tattheva antaradhāyī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

226. 226

     “किंkiṃ पनpa·na ते,te मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तोde·va·put·to चेतसाce·ta·sā चेतोce·to परिच्चpa·ric·ca विदितो?vi·di·to

     “Kiṁ pana te, moggallāna, kakudho devaputto cetasā ceto paricca vidito?

     The Buddha said, “But, Moggallāna, have you read Kakudha’s mind

227. 227

     यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तोde·va·put·to भासतिbhā·sa·ti सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ तथेवta·the·va होति,ho·ti नोno अञ्ञथा”ति?añ·ña·thā

     Yaṁ kiñci kakudho devaputto bhāsati sabbaṁ taṁ tatheva hoti, no aññathā”ti?

     so that you know that all he says is just so and not otherwise?”

228. 228

     “चेतसाce·ta·sā चेतोce·to परिच्चpa·ric·ca विदितोvi·di·to चca मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तो।de·va·put·to

     “Cetasā ceto paricca vidito ca me, bhante, kakudho devaputto.

     “I have, venerable sir.”

229. 229

     यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci ककुधोka·ku·dho देवपुत्तोde·va·put·to भासतिbhā·sa·ti सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ तथेवta·the·va होति,ho·ti नोno अञ्ञथा”ति।añ·ña·thā

     Yaṁ kiñci kakudho devaputto bhāsati sabbaṁ taṁ tatheva hoti, no aññathā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

230. 230

     “रक्खस्सेतं,rak·khas·se·taṃ मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na वाचं।vā·caṃ

     “Rakkhassetaṁ, moggallāna, vācaṁ.

     “Remember these words, Moggallāna!

231. 231

     रक्खस्सेतं,rak·khas·se·taṃ मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na वाचं।vā·caṃ

     Rakkhassetaṁ, moggallāna, vācaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

232. 232

     इदानिi·dā·ni सोso मोघपुरिसोmo·gha·pu·ri·so अत्तनावat·ta·nā·va अत्तानंat·tā·naṃ पातुकरिस्सति।pā·tu·ka·ris·sa·ti

     Idāni so moghapuriso attanāva attānaṁ pātukarissati.

     Soon that fool will show himself as he truly is.”

233. 233

     1।3। पञ्चसत्थुकथाpañ·ca·sat·thu·ka·thā

     1.3. Pañcasatthukathā

     3. Discussion of the five kinds of teachers

234. 234

     पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na सत्थारोsat·thā·ro सन्तोsan·to संविज्जमानाsaṃ·vij·ja·mā·nā लोकस्मिं।lo·kas·miṃ

     Pañcime, moggallāna, satthāro santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ.

     “Moggallāna, there are five kinds of teachers in the world.

235. 235

     कतमेka·ta·me पञ्च?pañ·ca

     Katame pañca?

     (Pāli only)

236. 236

     इध,i·dha मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na एकच्चोe·kac·co सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धसीलोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lo समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धसीलोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti ‘परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme सीलंsī·laṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     Idha, moggallāna, ekacco satthā aparisuddhasīlo samāno ‘parisuddhasīlomhī’ti paṭijānāti ‘parisuddhaṁ me sīlaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan’ti ca.

     One kind of teacher is impure in behavior, while claiming it is pure.

237. 237

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ सावकाsā·va·kā एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—jā·nan·ti

     Tamenaṁ sāvakā evaṁ jānanti—

     His disciples know about this,

238. 238

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho भवंbha·vaṃ सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धसीलोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lo समानोsa·mā·no “परिसुद्धसीलोम्ही”तिpa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti “परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme सीलंsī·laṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्”तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā aparisuddhasīlo samāno “parisuddhasīlomhī”ti paṭijānāti “parisuddhaṁ me sīlaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan”ti ca.

     (Pāli only)

239. 239

     मयञ्चेवma·yañ·ce·va खोkho पनpa·na गिहीनंgi·hī·naṃ आरोचेय्याम,ā·ro·cey·yā·ma नास्सस्सnās·sas·sa मनापं।ma·nā·paṃ

     Mayañceva kho pana gihīnaṁ āroceyyāma, nāssassa manāpaṁ.

     but think, ‘It would be unpleasant for him if we inform the householders.

240. 240

     यंyaṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa अमनापं,a·ma·nā·paṃ कथंka·thaṃ नंnaṃ मयंma·yaṃ तेनte·na समुदाचरेय्याम?sa·mu·dā·ca·rey·yā·ma

     Yaṁ kho panassa amanāpaṁ, kathaṁ naṁ mayaṁ tena samudācareyyāma?

     (Pāli only)

241. 241

     सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti खोkho पनpa·na चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारेन—cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·re·na

     Sammannati kho pana cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārena—

     And it’s because of him that we’re honored with gifts of robe-cloth, almsfood, dwellings, and medicinal supplies. How, then, can we inform them?

242. 242

     यंyaṃ तुमोtu·mo करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti तुमोवtu·mo·va तेनte·na पञ्ञायिस्सती’ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

     yaṁ tumo karissati, tumova tena paññāyissatī’ti.

     He’ll be known through his own actions.’

243. 243

     एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ खो,kho मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na सत्थारंsat·thā·raṃ सावकाsā·va·kā सीलतोsī·la·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Evarūpaṁ kho, moggallāna, satthāraṁ sāvakā sīlato rakkhanti;

     The disciples conceal the impure behavior of such a teacher,

244. 244

     एवरूपोe·va·rū·po चca पनpa·na सत्थाsat·thā सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi सीलतोsī·la·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     evarūpo ca pana satthā sāvakehi sīlato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsati.

     and the teacher expects them to do so.

245. 245

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धाजीवोa·pa·ri·sud·dhā·jī·vo समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धाजीवोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dhā·jī·vom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti ‘परिसुद्धोpa·ri·sud·dho मेme आजीवोā·jī·vo परियोदातोpa·ri·yo·dā·to असङ्किलिट्ठो’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭho च।ca

     Puna caparaṁ, moggallāna, idhekacco satthā aparisuddhājīvo samāno ‘parisuddhājīvomhī’ti paṭijānāti ‘parisuddho me ājīvo pariyodāto asaṅkiliṭṭho’ti ca.

     Another kind of teacher is impure in livelihood, while claiming it is pure.

246. 246

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ सावकाsā·va·kā एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—jā·nan·ti

     Tamenaṁ sāvakā evaṁ jānanti—

     His disciples know about this,

247. 247

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho भवंbha·vaṃ सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धाजीवोa·pa·ri·sud·dhā·jī·vo समानोsa·mā·no “परिसुद्धाजीवोम्ही”तिpa·ri·sud·dhā·jī·vom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti “परिसुद्धोpa·ri·sud·dho मेme आजीवोā·jī·vo परियोदातोpa·ri·yo·dā·to असङ्किलिट्ठो”तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭho च।ca

     ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā aparisuddhājīvo samāno “parisuddhājīvomhī”ti paṭijānāti “parisuddho me ājīvo pariyodāto asaṅkiliṭṭho”ti ca.

     (Pāli only)

248. 248

     मयञ्चेवma·yañ·ce·va खोkho पनpa·na गिहीनंgi·hī·naṃ आरोचेय्याम,ā·ro·cey·yā·ma नास्सस्सnās·sas·sa मनापं।ma·nā·paṃ

     Mayañceva kho pana gihīnaṁ āroceyyāma, nāssassa manāpaṁ.

     but think, ‘It would be unpleasant for him if we inform the householders.

249. 249

     यंyaṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa अमनापं,a·ma·nā·paṃ कथंka·thaṃ नंnaṃ मयंma·yaṃ तेनte·na समुदाचरेय्याम?sa·mu·dā·ca·rey·yā·ma

     Yaṁ kho panassa amanāpaṁ, kathaṁ naṁ mayaṁ tena samudācareyyāma?

     (Pāli only)

250. 250

     सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti खोkho पनpa·na चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारेन—cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·re·na

     Sammannati kho pana cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārena—

     And it’s because of him that we’re honored with gifts of robe-cloth, almsfood, dwellings, and medicinal supplies. How, then, can we inform them?

251. 251

     यंyaṃ तुमोtu·mo करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti तुमोवtu·mo·va तेनte·na पञ्ञायिस्सती’ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

     yaṁ tumo karissati, tumova tena paññāyissatī’ti.

     He’ll be known through his own actions.’

252. 252

     एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ खो,kho मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na सत्थारंsat·thā·raṃ सावकाsā·va·kā आजीवतोā·jī·va·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Evarūpaṁ kho, moggallāna, satthāraṁ sāvakā ājīvato rakkhanti;

     The disciples conceal the impure livelihood of such a teacher,

253. 253

     एवरूपोe·va·rū·po चca पनpa·na सत्थाsat·thā सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi आजीवतोā·jī·va·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     evarūpo ca pana satthā sāvakehi ājīvato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsati.

     and the teacher expects them to do so.

254. 254

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धधम्मदेसनोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·dham·ma·de·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धधम्मदेसनोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·dham·ma·de·sa·nom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti ‘परिसुद्धाpa·ri·sud·dhā मेme धम्मदेसनाdham·ma·de·sa·nā परियोदाताpa·ri·yo·dā·tā असङ्किलिट्ठा’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhā च।ca

     Puna caparaṁ, moggallāna, idhekacco satthā aparisuddhadhammadesano samāno ‘parisuddhadhammadesanomhī’ti paṭijānāti ‘parisuddhā me dhammadesanā pariyodātā asaṅkiliṭṭhā’ti ca.

     Still another kind of teacher gives impure teachings, while claiming they are pure.

255. 255

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ सावकाsā·va·kā एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—jā·nan·ti

     Tamenaṁ sāvakā evaṁ jānanti—

     His disciples know about this,

256. 256

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho भवंbha·vaṃ सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धधम्मदेसनोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·dham·ma·de·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no “परिसुद्धधम्मदेसनोम्ही”तिpa·ri·sud·dha·dham·ma·de·sa·nom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti “परिसुद्धाpa·ri·sud·dhā मेme धम्मदेसनाdham·ma·de·sa·nā परियोदाताpa·ri·yo·dā·tā असङ्किलिट्ठा”तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhā च।ca

     ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā aparisuddhadhammadesano samāno “parisuddhadhammadesanomhī”ti paṭijānāti “parisuddhā me dhammadesanā pariyodātā asaṅkiliṭṭhā”ti ca.

     (Pāli only)

257. 257

     मयञ्चेवma·yañ·ce·va खोkho पनpa·na गिहीनंgi·hī·naṃ आरोचेय्याम,ā·ro·cey·yā·ma नास्सस्सnās·sas·sa मनापं।ma·nā·paṃ

     Mayañceva kho pana gihīnaṁ āroceyyāma, nāssassa manāpaṁ.

     but think, ‘It would be unpleasant for him if we inform the householders.

258. 258

     यंyaṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa अमनापं,a·ma·nā·paṃ कथंka·thaṃ नंnaṃ मयंma·yaṃ तेनte·na समुदाचरेय्याम?sa·mu·dā·ca·rey·yā·ma

     Yaṁ kho panassa amanāpaṁ, kathaṁ naṁ mayaṁ tena samudācareyyāma?

     (Pāli only)

259. 259

     सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti खोkho पनpa·na चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारेन—cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·re·na

     Sammannati kho pana cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārena—

     And it’s because of him that we’re honored with gifts of robe-cloth, almsfood, dwellings, and medicinal supplies. How, then, can we inform them?

260. 260

     यंyaṃ तुमोtu·mo करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti तुमोवtu·mo·va तेनte·na पञ्ञायिस्सती’ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

     yaṁ tumo karissati, tumova tena paññāyissatī’ti.

     He’ll be known through his own actions.’

261. 261

     एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ खो,kho मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na सत्थारंsat·thā·raṃ सावकाsā·va·kā धम्मदेसनतोdham·ma·de·sa·na·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Evarūpaṁ kho, moggallāna, satthāraṁ sāvakā dhammadesanato rakkhanti;

     The disciples conceal the impure teachings of such a teacher,

262. 262

     एवरूपोe·va·rū·po चca पनpa·na सत्थाsat·thā सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi धम्मदेसनतोdham·ma·de·sa·na·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     evarūpo ca pana satthā sāvakehi dhammadesanato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsati.

     and the teacher expects them to do so.

263. 263

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धवेय्याकरणोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·vey·yā·ka·ra·ṇo समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धवेय्याकरणोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·vey·yā·ka·ra·ṇom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti ‘परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme वेय्याकरणंvey·yā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     Puna caparaṁ, moggallāna, idhekacco satthā aparisuddhaveyyākaraṇo samāno ‘parisuddhaveyyākaraṇomhī’ti paṭijānāti ‘parisuddhaṁ me veyyākaraṇaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan’ti ca.

     Still another kind of teacher gives impure explanations, while claiming they are pure.

264. 264

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ सावकाsā·va·kā एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—jā·nan·ti

     Tamenaṁ sāvakā evaṁ jānanti—

     His disciples know about this,

265. 265

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho भवंbha·vaṃ सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धवेय्याकरणोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·vey·yā·ka·ra·ṇo समानोsa·mā·no “परिसुद्धवेय्याकरणोम्ही”तिpa·ri·sud·dha·vey·yā·ka·ra·ṇom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti “परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme वेय्याकरणंvey·yā·ka·ra·ṇaṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्”तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā aparisuddhaveyyākaraṇo samāno “parisuddhaveyyākaraṇomhī”ti paṭijānāti “parisuddhaṁ me veyyākaraṇaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan”ti ca.

     (Pāli only)

266. 266

     मयञ्चेवma·yañ·ce·va खोkho पनpa·na गिहीनंgi·hī·naṃ आरोचेय्याम,ā·ro·cey·yā·ma नास्सस्सnās·sas·sa मनापं।ma·nā·paṃ

     Mayañceva kho pana gihīnaṁ āroceyyāma, nāssassa manāpaṁ.

     but think, ‘It would be unpleasant for him if we inform the householders.

267. 267

     यंyaṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa अमनापं,a·ma·nā·paṃ कथंka·thaṃ नंnaṃ मयंma·yaṃ तेनte·na समुदाचरेय्याम?sa·mu·dā·ca·rey·yā·ma

     Yaṁ kho panassa amanāpaṁ, kathaṁ naṁ mayaṁ tena samudācareyyāma?

     (Pāli only)

268. 268

     सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti खोkho पनpa·na चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारेन—cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·re·na

     Sammannati kho pana cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārena—

     And it’s because of him that we’re honored with gifts of robe-cloth, almsfood, dwellings, and medicinal supplies. How, then, can we inform them?

269. 269

     यंyaṃ तुमोtu·mo करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti तुमोवtu·mo·va तेनte·na पञ्ञायिस्सती’ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

     yaṁ tumo karissati, tumova tena paññāyissatī’ti.

     He’ll be known through his own actions.’

270. 270

     एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ खो,kho मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na सत्थारंsat·thā·raṃ सावकाsā·va·kā वेय्याकरणतोvey·yā·ka·ra·ṇa·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Evarūpaṁ kho, moggallāna, satthāraṁ sāvakā veyyākaraṇato rakkhanti;

     The disciples conceal the impure explanations of such a teacher,

271. 271

     एवरूपोe·va·rū·po चca पनpa·na सत्थाsat·thā सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi वेय्याकरणतोvey·yā·ka·ra·ṇa·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     evarūpo ca pana satthā sāvakehi veyyākaraṇato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsati.

     and the teacher expects them to do so.

272. 272

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·nom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti ‘परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme ञाणदस्सनंñā·ṇa·das·sa·naṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     Puna caparaṁ, moggallāna, idhekacco satthā aparisuddhañāṇadassano samāno ‘parisuddhañāṇadassanomhī’ti paṭijānāti ‘parisuddhaṁ me ñāṇadassanaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan’ti ca.

     Still another kind of teacher has impure knowledge and vision, while claiming they are pure.

273. 273

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ सावकाsā·va·kā एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—jā·nan·ti

     Tamenaṁ sāvakā evaṁ jānanti—

     His disciples know about this,

274. 274

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho भवंbha·vaṃ सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no “परिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोम्ही”तिpa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·nom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti “परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme ञाणदस्सनंñā·ṇa·das·sa·naṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्”तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā aparisuddhañāṇadassano samāno “parisuddhañāṇadassanomhī”ti paṭijānāti “parisuddhaṁ me ñāṇadassanaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan”ti ca.

     (Pāli only)

275. 275

     मयञ्चेवma·yañ·ce·va खोkho पनpa·na गिहीनंgi·hī·naṃ आरोचेय्याम,ā·ro·cey·yā·ma नास्सस्सnās·sas·sa मनापं।ma·nā·paṃ

     Mayañceva kho pana gihīnaṁ āroceyyāma, nāssassa manāpaṁ.

     but think, ‘It would be unpleasant for him if we inform the householders.

276. 276

     यंyaṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa अमनापं,a·ma·nā·paṃ कथंka·thaṃ नंnaṃ मयंma·yaṃ तेनte·na समुदाचरेय्याम?sa·mu·dā·ca·rey·yā·ma

     Yaṁ kho panassa amanāpaṁ, kathaṁ naṁ mayaṁ tena samudācareyyāma?

     (Pāli only)

277. 277

     सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti खोkho पनpa·na चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारेन—cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·re·na

     Sammannati kho pana cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārena—

     And it’s because of him that we’re honored with gifts of robe-cloth, almsfood, dwellings, and medicinal supplies. How, then, can we inform them?

278. 278

     यंyaṃ तुमोtu·mo करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti तुमोवtu·mo·va तेनte·na पञ्ञायिस्सती’ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

     yaṁ tumo karissati, tumova tena paññāyissatī’ti.

     He’ll be known through his own actions.’

279. 279

     एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ खो,kho मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na सत्थारंsat·thā·raṃ सावकाsā·va·kā ञाणदस्सनतोñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Evarūpaṁ kho, moggallāna, satthāraṁ sāvakā ñāṇadassanato rakkhanti;

     The disciples conceal the impure knowledge and vision of such a teacher,

280. 280

     एवरूपोe·va·rū·po चca पनpa·na सत्थाsat·thā सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi ञाणदस्सनतोñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसतीति।pac·cā·sī·sa·tī·ti

     evarūpo ca pana satthā sāvakehi ñāṇadassanato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsatīti.

     and the teacher expects them to do so.

281. 281

     इमेi·me खो,kho मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na पञ्चpañ·ca सत्थारोsat·thā·ro सन्तोsan·to संविज्जमानाsaṃ·vij·ja·mā·nā लोकस्मिं।lo·kas·miṃ

     Ime kho, moggallāna, pañca satthāro santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ.

     (Pāli only)

282. 282

     अहंa·haṃ खोkho पन,pa·na मोग्गल्लान,mog·gal·lā·na परिसुद्धसीलोpa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lo समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धसीलोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lom·hī पटिजानामिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·mi ‘परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme सीलंsī·laṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     Ahaṁ kho pana, moggallāna, parisuddhasīlo samāno ‘parisuddhasīlomhī’ti paṭijānāmi ‘parisuddhaṁ me sīlaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan’ti ca.

     But in my case, Moggallāna, I claim my behavior is pure because it is.

283. 283

     नna चca मंmaṃ सावकाsā·va·kā सीलतोsī·la·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Na ca maṁ sāvakā sīlato rakkhanti;

     My disciples don’t conceal my behavior,

284. 284

     नna चाहंcā·haṃ सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi सीलतोsī·la·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसामि।pac·cā·sī·sā·mi

     na cāhaṁ sāvakehi sīlato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsāmi.

     and I don’t expect them to do so.

285. 285

     परिसुद्धाजीवोpa·ri·sud·dhā·jī·vo समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     Parisuddhājīvo samāno …pe…

     I claim my livelihood is pure …

286. 286

     परिसुद्धधम्मदेसनोpa·ri·sud·dha·dham·ma·de·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     parisuddhadhammadesano samāno …pe…

     I claim my teachings are pure …

287. 287

     परिसुद्धवेय्याकरणोpa·ri·sud·dha·vey·yā·ka·ra·ṇo समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     parisuddhaveyyākaraṇo samāno …pe…

     I claim my explanations are pure …

288. 288

     परिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोpa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·nom·hī पटिजानामिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·mi ‘परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme ञाणदस्सनंñā·ṇa·das·sa·naṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     parisuddhañāṇadassano samāno ‘parisuddhañāṇadassanomhī’ti paṭijānāmi ‘parisuddhaṁ me ñāṇadassanaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan’ti ca.

     I claim my knowledge and vision are pure because they are.

289. 289

     नna चca मंmaṃ सावकाsā·va·kā ञाणदस्सनतोñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Na ca maṁ sāvakā ñāṇadassanato rakkhanti;

     My disciples don’t conceal my knowledge and vision,

290. 290

     नna चाहंcā·haṃ सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi ञाणदस्सनतोñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसामी”ति।pac·cā·sī·sā·mī

     na cāhaṁ sāvakehi ñāṇadassanato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsāmī”ti.

     and I don’t expect them to do so.”

291. 291

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā कोसम्बियंko·sam·bi·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā kosambiyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena rājagahaṁ tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     When the Buddha had stayed at Kosambī for as long as he liked, he set out wandering toward Rājagaha.

292. 292

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena rājagahaṁ tadavasari.

     When he eventually arrived,

293. 293

     तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti वेळुवनेve·ḷu·va·ne कलन्दकनिवापे।ka·lan·da·ka·ni·vā·pe

     Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.

     he stayed in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrel sanctuary.

294. 294

     अथa·tha खोkho सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     Then a number of monks went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

295. 295

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and said,

296. 296

     “देवदत्तस्स,de·va·dat·tas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi रथसतेहिra·tha·sa·te·hi सायंsā·yaṃ पातंpā·taṃ उपट्ठानंu·paṭ·ṭhā·naṃ गच्छति;gac·cha·ti

     “devadattassa, bhante, ajātasattu kumāro pañcahi rathasatehi sāyaṁ pātaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ gacchati;

     “Sir, Prince Ajātasattu attends on Devadatta morning and evening, with five hundred carriages

297. 297

     पञ्चpañ·ca चca थालिपाकसतानिthā·li·pā·ka·sa·tā·ni भत्ताभिहारोbhat·tā·bhi·hā·ro अभिहरीयती”ति।a·bhi·ha·rī·ya·tī

     pañca ca thālipākasatāni bhattābhihāro abhiharīyatī”ti.

     and a meal offering of five hundred dishes of food.”

298. 298

     “मा,mā भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकंlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·kaṃ पिहयित्थ।pi·ha·yit·tha

     “Mā, bhikkhave, devadattassa lābhasakkārasilokaṁ pihayittha.

     “Monks, don’t envy Devadatta his material support, honor, and praise.

299. 299

     यावकीवञ्च,yā·va·kī·vañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi रथसतेहिra·tha·sa·te·hi सायंsā·yaṃ पातंpā·taṃ उपट्ठानंu·paṭ·ṭhā·naṃ गमिस्सति,ga·mis·sa·ti पञ्चpañ·ca चca थालिपाकसतानिthā·li·pā·ka·sa·tā·ni भत्ताभिहारोbhat·tā·bhi·hā·ro अभिहरीयिस्सति,a·bhi·ha·rī·yis·sa·ti हानियेव,hā·ni·ye·va भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa पाटिकङ्खाpā·ṭi·kaṅ·khā कुसलेसुku·sa·le·su धम्मेसु,dham·me·su नोno वुड्ढि।vuḍ·ḍhi

     Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, devadattassa ajātasattu kumāro pañcahi rathasatehi sāyaṁ pātaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ gamissati, pañca ca thālipākasatāni bhattābhihāro abhiharīyissati, hāniyeva, bhikkhave, devadattassa pāṭikaṅkhā kusalesu dhammesu, no vuḍḍhi.

     So long as Prince Ajātasattu treats him like this, Devadatta can be expected to decline in good qualities.

300. 300

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve चण्डस्सcaṇ·ḍas·sa कुक्कुरस्सkuk·ku·ras·sa नासायnā·sā·ya पित्तंpit·taṃ भिन्देय्युं,bhin·dey·yuṃ एवञ्हिe·vañ·hi सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कुक्कुरोkuk·ku·ro भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya चण्डतरोcaṇ·ḍa·ta·ro अस्स;as·sa

     Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, caṇḍassa kukkurassa nāsāya pittaṁ bhindeyyuṁ, evañhi so, bhikkhave, kukkuro bhiyyoso mattāya caṇḍataro assa;

     Just as a fierce dog would get even fiercer if you break a gall bladder on its nose,

301. 301

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यावकीवञ्चyā·va·kī·vañ·ca देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi रथसतेहिra·tha·sa·te·hi सायंsā·yaṃ पातंpā·taṃ उपट्ठानंu·paṭ·ṭhā·naṃ गमिस्सति,ga·mis·sa·ti पञ्चpañ·ca चca थालिपाकसतानिthā·li·pā·ka·sa·tā·ni भत्ताभिहारोbhat·tā·bhi·hā·ro अभिहरीयिस्सति,a·bhi·ha·rī·yis·sa·ti हानियेव,hā·ni·ye·va भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa पाटिकङ्खाpā·ṭi·kaṅ·khā कुसलेसुku·sa·le·su धम्मेसु,dham·me·su नोno वुड्ढि।vuḍ·ḍhi

     evameva kho, bhikkhave, yāvakīvañca devadattassa ajātasattu kumāro pañcahi rathasatehi sāyaṁ pātaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ gamissati, pañca ca thālipākasatāni bhattābhihāro abhiharīyissati, hāniyeva, bhikkhave, devadattassa pāṭikaṅkhā kusalesu dhammesu, no vuḍḍhi.

     so too, so long as Prince Ajātasattu treats him like this, Devadatta can be expected to decline in good qualities.

302. 302

     अत्तवधाय,at·ta·va·dhā·ya भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि,u·da·pā·di पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि।u·da·pā·di

     Attavadhāya, bhikkhave, devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi, parābhavāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi.

     (Pāli only)

303. 303

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कदलीka·da·lī अत्तवधायat·ta·va·dhā·ya फलंpha·laṃ देति,de·ti पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya फलंpha·laṃ देति;de·ti

     Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, kadalī attavadhāya phalaṁ deti, parābhavāya phalaṁ deti;

     Just as a plantain banana tree produces fruit to its own destruction and ruin,

304. 304

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अत्तवधायat·ta·va·dhā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि,u·da·pā·di पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि।u·da·pā·di

     evameva kho, bhikkhave, attavadhāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi, parābhavāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi.

     so too will Devadatta’s material support, honor, and praise cause his own destruction and ruin.

305. 305

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वेळुve·ḷu अत्तवधायat·ta·va·dhā·ya फलंpha·laṃ देति,de·ti पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya फलंpha·laṃ देति;de·ti

     Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, veḷu attavadhāya phalaṁ deti, parābhavāya phalaṁ deti;

     Just as a bamboo produces fruit to its own destruction and ruin,

306. 306

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अत्तवधायat·ta·va·dhā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि,u·da·pā·di पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि।u·da·pā·di

     evameva kho, bhikkhave, attavadhāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi, parābhavāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi.

     so too will Devadatta’s material support, honor, and praise cause his own destruction and ruin.

307. 307

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve नळोna·ḷo अत्तवधायat·ta·va·dhā·ya फलंpha·laṃ देति,de·ti पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya फलंpha·laṃ देति;de·ti

     Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, naḷo attavadhāya phalaṁ deti, parābhavāya phalaṁ deti;

     Just as a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>naḷa</i> reed produces fruit to its own destruction and ruin,

308. 308

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अत्तवधायat·ta·va·dhā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि,u·da·pā·di पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि।u·da·pā·di

     evameva kho, bhikkhave, attavadhāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi, parābhavāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi.

     so too will Devadatta’s material support, honor, and praise cause his own destruction and ruin.

309. 309

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अस्सतरीas·sa·ta·rī अत्तवधायat·ta·va·dhā·ya गब्भंgab·bhaṃ गण्हाति,gaṇ·hā·ti पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya गब्भंgab·bhaṃ गण्हाति;gaṇ·hā·ti

     Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, assatarī attavadhāya gabbhaṁ gaṇhāti, parābhavāya gabbhaṁ gaṇhāti;

     Just as a mule becomes pregnant to its own destruction and ruin,

310. 310

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अत्तवधायat·ta·va·dhā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादि,u·da·pā·di पराभवायpa·rā·bha·vā·ya देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारसिलोकोlā·bha·sak·kā·ra·si·lo·ko उदपादीति।u·da·pā·dī·ti

     evameva kho, bhikkhave, attavadhāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādi, parābhavāya devadattassa lābhasakkārasiloko udapādīti.

     so too will Devadatta’s material support, honor, and praise cause his own destruction and ruin.”

311. 311

     फलंpha·laṃ वेve कदलिंka·da·liṃ हन्ति,han·ti

     Phalaṁ ve kadaliṁ hanti,

     “The fruit destroys the plantain,

312. 312

     फलंpha·laṃ वेळुंve·ḷuṃ फलंpha·laṃ नळं;na·ḷaṃ

     phalaṁ veḷuṁ phalaṁ naḷaṁ;

     And the bamboo and the reed.

313. 313

     सक्कारोsak·kā·ro कापुरिसंkā·pu·ri·saṃ हन्ति,han·ti

     Sakkāro kāpurisaṁ hanti,

     Honor destroys the bad person,

314. 314

     गब्भोgab·bho अस्सतरिंas·sa·ta·riṃ यथा”ति।ya·thā

     gabbho assatariṁ yathā”ti.

     As the fetus destroys the mule.”

315. 315

     पठमभाणवारोpa·ṭha·ma·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

     The first section for recitation is finished.

316. 316

     The second section

317. 317

     2।1। पकासनीयकम्मpa·kā·sa·nī·ya·kam·ma

     2.1. Pakāsanīyakamma

     4. The legal procedure of announcement

318. 318

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā महतियाma·ha·ti·yā परिसायpa·ri·sā·ya परिवुतोpa·ri·vu·to धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेन्तोde·sen·to निसिन्नोni·sin·no होतिho·ti सराजिकायsa·rā·ji·kā·ya परिसाय।pa·ri·sā·ya

     Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā mahatiyā parisāya parivuto dhammaṁ desento nisinno hoti sarājikāya parisāya.

     Soon afterwards the Buddha was seated giving a teaching surrounded by a large gathering of people, including the king.

319. 319

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनञ्जलिंte·nañ·ja·liṃ पणामेत्वाpa·ṇā·met·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho devadatto uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     Devadatta then got up from his seat, arranged his upper robe over one shoulder, raised his joined palms, and said,

320. 320

     “जिण्णोjiṇ·ṇo दानि,dā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā वुड्ढोvuḍ·ḍho महल्लकोma·hal·la·ko अद्धगतोad·dha·ga·to वयोअनुप्पत्तो।va·yo·a·nup·pat·to

     “jiṇṇo dāni, bhante, bhagavā vuḍḍho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto.

     “Sir, you’re now old and close to the end of life.

321. 321

     अप्पोस्सुक्कोap·pos·suk·ko दानि,dā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā दिट्ठधम्मसुखविहारंdiṭ·ṭha·dham·ma·su·kha·vi·hā·raṃ अनुयुत्तोa·nu·yut·to विहरतु,vi·ha·ra·tu ममंma·maṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ निस्सज्जतु।nis·saj·ja·tu

     Appossukko dāni, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṁ anuyutto viharatu, mamaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ nissajjatu.

     You should live free from bother and enjoy the happiness of meditation. Hand the Sangha of monks over to me.

322. 322

     अहंa·haṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ परिहरिस्सामी”ति।pa·ri·ha·ris·sā·mī

     Ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmī”ti.

     Let me lead the Sangha.”

323. 323

     “अलं,a·laṃ देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta माmā तेte रुच्चिruc·ci भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ परिहरितुन्”ति।pa·ri·ha·ri·tun

     “Alaṁ, devadatta, mā te rucci bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharitun”ti.

     “Let it be, Devadatta, don’t think of leading the Sangha of monks.”

324. 324

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to …पे…pe

     Dutiyampi kho devadatto …pe…

     A second time Devadatta said the same thing and got the same reply.

325. 325

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     tatiyampi kho devadatto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     He then said it a third time,

326. 326

     “जिण्णोjiṇ·ṇo दानि,dā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā वुड्ढोvuḍ·ḍho महल्लकोma·hal·la·ko अद्धगतोad·dha·ga·to वयोअनुप्पत्तो।va·yo·a·nup·pat·to

     “jiṇṇo dāni, bhante, bhagavā vuḍḍho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto.

     (Pāli only)

327. 327

     अप्पोस्सुक्कोap·pos·suk·ko दानि,dā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā दिट्ठधम्मसुखविहारंdiṭ·ṭha·dham·ma·su·kha·vi·hā·raṃ अनुयुत्तोa·nu·yut·to विहरतु,vi·ha·ra·tu ममंma·maṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ निस्सज्जतु।nis·saj·ja·tu

     Appossukko dāni, bhante, bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṁ anuyutto viharatu, mamaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ nissajjatu.

     (Pāli only)

328. 328

     अहंa·haṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ परिहरिस्सामी”ति।pa·ri·ha·ris·sā·mī

     Ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmī”ti.

     and the Buddha replied:

329. 329

     “सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानानम्पिsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā·nam·pi खोkho अहं,a·haṃ देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ नna निस्सज्जेय्यं,nis·saj·jey·yaṃ किंkiṃ पनpa·na तुय्हंtuy·haṃ छवस्सcha·vas·sa खेळासकस्सा”ति।khe·ḷā·sa·kas·sā

     “Sāriputtamoggallānānampi kho ahaṁ, devadatta, bhikkhusaṅghaṁ na nissajjeyyaṁ, kiṁ pana tuyhaṁ chavassa kheḷāsakassā”ti.

     “I wouldn’t even hand the Sangha over to Sāriputta and Mogallāna, so why then to you, a wretched devourer of junk?”

330. 330

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तो—de·va·dat·to

     Atha kho devadatto—

     Devadatta thought,

331. 331

     सराजिकायsa·rā·ji·kā·ya मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā परिसायpa·ri·sā·ya खेळासकवादेनkhe·ḷā·sa·ka·vā·de·na अपसादेति,a·pa·sā·de·ti सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानेवsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·ne·va उक्कंसतीति—uk·kaṃ·sa·tī·ti

     sarājikāya maṁ bhagavā parisāya kheḷāsakavādena apasādeti, sāriputtamoggallāneva ukkaṁsatīti—

     “The Buddha disparages me in front of a gathering that includes the king as a devourer of junk, while praising Sāriputta and Mogallāna,”

332. 332

     कुपितोku·pi·to अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     kupito anattamano bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     and he bowed down in anger, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.

333. 333

     अयञ्चरहिa·yañ·ca·ra·hi देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa भगवतिbha·ga·va·ti पठमोpa·ṭha·mo आघातोā·ghā·to अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Ayañcarahi devadattassa bhagavati paṭhamo āghāto ahosi.

     This was the first time Devadatta had ill will toward the Buddha.

334. 334

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha addressed the monks:

335. 335

     “तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घोsaṅ·gho देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासनीयंpa·kā·sa·nī·yaṃ कम्मंkam·maṃ करोतु—ka·ro·tu

     “tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho devadattassa rājagahe pakāsanīyaṁ kammaṁ karotu—

     “Well then, the Sangha should do a legal procedure for the purpose of making an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—

336. 336

     ‘पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     ‘pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     ‘Devadatta’s character has changed.

337. 337

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो’ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo’ti.

     Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.’

338. 338

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कातब्बं।kā·tab·baṃ

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, kātabbaṁ.

     And it should be done in this way.

339. 339

     ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

     Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

     A competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:

340. 340

     ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

341. 341

     यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लंpat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासनीयंpa·kā·sa·nī·yaṃ कम्मंkam·maṃ करेय्य—ka·rey·ya

     Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ saṅgho devadattassa rājagahe pakāsanīyaṁ kammaṁ kareyya—

     If the Sangha is ready, it should do a legal procedure for the purpose of making an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—

342. 342

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     “Devadatta’s character has changed.

343. 343

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti.

     Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”

344. 344

     एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

     Esā ñatti.

     This is the motion.

345. 345

     सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

346. 346

     सङ्घोsaṅ·gho देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासनीयंpa·kā·sa·nī·yaṃ कम्मंkam·maṃ करोति—ka·ro·ti

     Saṅgho devadattassa rājagahe pakāsanīyaṁ kammaṁ karoti—

     The Sangha does a legal procedure for the purpose of making an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—

347. 347

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     “Devadatta’s character has changed.

348. 348

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti.

     Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”

349. 349

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासनीयस्सpa·kā·sa·nī·yas·sa कम्मस्सkam·mas·sa करणं—ka·ra·ṇaṃ

     Yassāyasmato khamati devadattassa rājagahe pakāsanīyassa kammassa karaṇaṁ—

     Any monk who approves of doing a legal procedure for the purpose of making an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—“Devadatta’s character has changed. Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”—

350. 350

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति,pa·ka·ti यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति—daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati, yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti—

     (Pāli only)

351. 351

     सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

     so tuṇhassa;

     should remain silent.

352. 352

     यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

     yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

     Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

353. 353

     कतंka·taṃ सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासनीयंpa·kā·sa·nī·yaṃ कम्मं—kam·maṃ

     Kataṁ saṅghena devadattassa rājagahe pakāsanīyaṁ kammaṁ—

     The Sangha has done a legal procedure for the purpose of making an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—

354. 354

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     “Devadatta’s character has changed.

355. 355

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti.

     Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”

356. 356

     खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

     Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

     The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

357. 357

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ āmantesi—

     The Buddha then addressed Sāriputta:

358. 358

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेही”ति।pa·kā·se·hī

     “tena hi tvaṁ, sāriputta, devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsehī”ti.

     “Well then, Sāriputta, make that announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha.”

359. 359

     “पुब्बेpub·be मया,ma·yā भन्ते,bhan·te देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he वण्णोvaṇ·ṇo भासितो—bhā·si·to

     “Pubbe mayā, bhante, devadattassa rājagahe vaṇṇo bhāsito—

     “In the past, sir, I have praised Devadatta in Rājagaha,

360. 360

     ‘महिद्धिकोma·hid·dhi·ko गोधिपुत्तो,go·dhi·put·to महानुभावोma·hā·nu·bhā·vo गोधिपुत्तो’ति।go·dhi·put·to

     ‘mahiddhiko godhiputto, mahānubhāvo godhiputto’ti.

     saying, ‘Godhiputta is powerful and mighty.’

361. 361

     कथाहं,ka·thā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेमी”ति?pa·kā·se·mī

     Kathāhaṁ, bhante, devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsemī”ti?

     How, then, can I now make this announcement about him?”

362. 362

     “ननुna·nu तया,ta·yā सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भूतोयेवbhū·to·ye·va देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he वण्णोvaṇ·ṇo भासितो—bhā·si·to

     “Nanu tayā, sāriputta, bhūtoyeva devadattassa rājagahe vaṇṇo bhāsito—

     “Didn’t you praise him truthfully

363. 363

     ‘महिद्धिकोma·hid·dhi·ko गोधिपुत्तो,go·dhi·put·to महानुभावोma·hā·nu·bhā·vo गोधिपुत्तो’”ति?go·dhi·put·to

     ‘mahiddhiko godhiputto, mahānubhāvo godhiputto’”ti?

     when you said that?”

364. 364

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”ति।bhan·te

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti.

     “I did.”

365. 365

     “एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भूतंयेवbhū·taṃ·ye·va देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेही”ति।pa·kā·se·hī

     “Evameva kho tvaṁ, sāriputta, bhūtaṁyeva devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsehī”ti.

     “In the same way, you should make this announcement truthfully.”

366. 366

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato paccassosi.

     “Yes, sir.”

367. 367

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     The Buddha then addressed the monks:

368. 368

     “तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ सम्मन्नतुsam·man·na·tu देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेतुं—pa·kā·se·tuṃ

     “tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho sāriputtaṁ sammannatu devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsetuṁ—

     “Well then, the Sangha should appoint Sāriputta to make that announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha.

369. 369

     ‘पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     ‘pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     (Pāli only)

370. 370

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो’ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo’ti.

     (Pāli only)

371. 371

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

     And he should be appointed like this.

372. 372

     पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to याचितब्बो।yā·ci·tab·bo

     Paṭhamaṁ sāriputto yācitabbo.

     First Sāriputta should be asked,

373. 373

     याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

     Yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

     and then a competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:

374. 374

     ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

375. 375

     यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ सम्मन्नेय्यsam·man·ney·ya देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेतुं—pa·kā·se·tuṃ

     Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ sammanneyya devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsetuṁ—

     If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint Venerable Sāriputta to make an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—

376. 376

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     “Devadatta’s character has changed.

377. 377

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti.

     Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”

378. 378

     एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

     Esā ñatti.

     This is the motion.

379. 379

     सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

380. 380

     सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेतुं—pa·kā·se·tuṃ

     Saṅgho āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ sammannati devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsetuṁ—

     The Sangha appoints Venerable Sāriputta to make an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—

381. 381

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति,pa·ka·ti यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati, yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti.

     “Devadatta’s character has changed. Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”

382. 382

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमति,kha·ma·ti आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa सम्मुतिsam·mu·ti देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेतुं—pa·kā·se·tuṃ

     Yassāyasmato khamati, āyasmato sāriputtassa sammuti devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsetuṁ—

     Any monk who approves of appointing Venerable Sāriputta to make an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—“Devadatta’s character has changed. Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”—

383. 383

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति,pa·ka·ti यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति—daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati, yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti—

     (Pāli only)

384. 384

     सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

     so tuṇhassa;

     should remain silent.

385. 385

     यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

     yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

     Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

386. 386

     सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेतुं—pa·kā·se·tuṃ

     Sammato saṅghena āyasmā sāriputto devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsetuṁ—

     The Sangha has appointed Venerable Sāriputta to make an announcement about Devadatta in Rājagaha—

387. 387

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     “Devadatta’s character has changed.

388. 388

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti.

     Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”

389. 389

     खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

     Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

     The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

390. 390

     सम्मतोsam·ma·to चca आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to सम्बहुलेहिsam·ba·hu·le·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासेसि—pa·kā·se·si

     Sammato ca āyasmā sāriputto sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ rājagahaṁ pavisitvā devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsesi—

     When he had been appointed, Sāriputta entered Rājagaha accompanied by a number of monks. He then made that announcement about Devadatta—

391. 391

     “पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     “pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     “Devadatta’s character has changed.

392. 392

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो”ति।daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo”ti.

     Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta.”

393. 393

     तत्थtat·tha येye तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā अस्सद्धाas·sad·dhā अप्पसन्नाap·pa·san·nā दुब्बुद्धिनो,dub·bud·dhi·no तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Tattha ye te manussā assaddhā appasannā dubbuddhino, te evamāhaṁsu—

     The foolish people there, those with little faith and confidence, said,

394. 394

     “उसूयकाu·sū·ya·kā इमेi·me समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारंlā·bha·sak·kā·raṃ उसूयन्ती”ति।u·sū·yan·tī

     “usūyakā ime samaṇā sakyaputtiyā devadattassa lābhasakkāraṁ usūyantī”ti.

     “These Sakyan monastics are envious of Devadatta’s material support and honor.”

395. 395

     येye पनpa·na तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā सद्धाsad·dhā पसन्नाpa·san·nā पण्डिताpaṇ·ḍi·tā ब्यत्ताbyat·tā बुद्धिमन्तो,bud·dhi·man·to तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ye pana te manussā saddhā pasannā paṇḍitā byattā buddhimanto, te evamāhaṁsu—

     But the wise ones, those with faith and confidence, said,

396. 396

     “नna खोkho इदंi·daṃ ओरकंo·ra·kaṃ भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti यथाya·thā भगवाbha·ga·vā देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासापेती”ति।pa·kā·sā·pe·tī

     “na kho idaṁ orakaṁ bhavissati yathā bhagavā devadattaṁ rājagahe pakāsāpetī”ti.

     “This must be a serious matter, seeing as the Buddha has had an announcement made about Devadatta in Rājagaha.”

397. 397

     2।2। अजातसत्तुकुमारवत्थुa·jā·ta·sat·tu·ku·mā·ra·vat·thu

     2.2. Ajātasattukumāravatthu

     5. The account of Prince Ajātasattu

398. 398

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to येनye·na अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā अजातसत्तुंa·jā·ta·sat·tuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho devadatto yena ajātasattu kumāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā ajātasattuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     Soon afterwards Devadatta went to Prince Ajātasattu and said,

399. 399

     “पुब्बेpub·be खो,kho कुमार,ku·mā·ra मनुस्साma·nus·sā दीघायुका,dī·ghā·yu·kā एतरहिe·ta·ra·hi अप्पायुका।ap·pā·yu·kā

     “pubbe kho, kumāra, manussā dīghāyukā, etarahi appāyukā.

     “In the past, prince, people were long-lived, but now they’re short-lived.

400. 400

     ठानंṭhā·naṃ खोkho पनेतंpa·ne·taṃ विज्जतिvij·ja·ti यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ कुमारोवku·mā·ro·va समानोsa·mā·no कालंkā·laṃ करेय्यासि।ka·rey·yā·si

     Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati yaṁ tvaṁ kumārova samāno kālaṁ kareyyāsi.

     It’s possible that you might die while still a prince.

401. 401

     तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ कुमार,ku·mā·ra पितरंpi·ta·raṃ हन्त्वाhan·tvā राजाrā·jā होहि।ho·hi

     Tena hi tvaṁ, kumāra, pitaraṁ hantvā rājā hohi.

     So then, kill your father and become the king.

402. 402

     अहंa·haṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ हन्त्वाhan·tvā बुद्धोbud·dho भविस्सामी”ति।bha·vis·sā·mī

     Ahaṁ bhagavantaṁ hantvā buddho bhavissāmī”ti.

     And I’ll kill the Buddha and take his place.”

403. 403

     अथa·tha खोkho अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारो—ku·mā·ro

     Atha kho ajātasattu kumāro—

     Ajātasattu thought,

404. 404

     “अय्योay·yo खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to महिद्धिकोma·hid·dhi·ko महानुभावो,ma·hā·nu·bhā·vo जानेय्यासिjā·ney·yā·si अय्योay·yo देवदत्तो”ति—de·va·dat·to

     “ayyo kho devadatto mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo, jāneyyāsi ayyo devadatto”ti—

     “Venerable Devadatta is powerful and mighty. He would know.”

405. 405

     ऊरुयाū·ru·yā पोत्थनिकंpot·tha·ni·kaṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā दिवाdi·vā दिवस्सdi·vas·sa भीतोbhī·to उब्बिग्गोub·big·go उस्सङ्कीus·saṅ·kī उत्रस्तोut·ras·to सहसाsa·ha·sā अन्तेपुरंan·te·pu·raṃ पाविसि।pā·vi·si

     ūruyā potthanikaṁ bandhitvā divā divassa bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto sahasā antepuraṁ pāvisi.

     He then bound a dagger to his thigh, and while fearful and agitated, he hastily entered the royal compound in the middle of the day.

406. 406

     अद्दसासुंad·da·sā·suṃ खोkho अन्तेपुरेan·te·pu·re उपचारकाu·pa·cā·ra·kā महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā अजातसत्तुंa·jā·ta·sat·tuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ दिवाdi·vā दिवस्सdi·vas·sa भीतंbhī·taṃ उब्बिग्गंub·big·gaṃ उस्सङ्किंus·saṅ·kiṃ उत्रस्तंut·ras·taṃ सहसाsa·ha·sā अन्तेपुरंan·te·pu·raṃ पविसन्तं;pa·vi·san·taṃ

     Addasāsuṁ kho antepure upacārakā mahāmattā ajātasattuṁ kumāraṁ divā divassa bhītaṁ ubbiggaṁ ussaṅkiṁ utrastaṁ sahasā antepuraṁ pavisantaṁ;

     The officials there saw Ajātasattu’s strange behavior

407. 407

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na अग्गहेसुं।ag·ga·he·suṃ

     disvāna aggahesuṁ.

     and seized him.

408. 408

     तेte विचिनन्ताvi·ci·nan·tā ऊरुयाū·ru·yā पोत्थनिकंpot·tha·ni·kaṃ बद्धंbad·dhaṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na अजातसत्तुंa·jā·ta·sat·tuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Te vicinantā ūruyā potthanikaṁ baddhaṁ disvāna ajātasattuṁ kumāraṁ etadavocuṁ—

     When they examined him, they found the dagger tied to his thigh. They asked him

409. 409

     “किंkiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ कुमार,ku·mā·ra कत्तुकामोसी”ति?kat·tu·kā·mo·sī

     “kiṁ tvaṁ, kumāra, kattukāmosī”ti?

     what he was up to.

410. 410

     “पितरम्हिpi·ta·ram·hi हन्तुकामो”ति।han·tu·kā·mo

     “Pitaramhi hantukāmo”ti.

     “I wish to kill my father.”

411. 411

     “केनासिke·nā·si उस्साहितो”ति?us·sā·hi·to

     “Kenāsi ussāhito”ti?

     “Has anyone encouraged you?”

412. 412

     “अय्येनay·ye·na देवदत्तेना”ति।de·va·dat·te·nā

     “Ayyena devadattenā”ti.

     “Venerable Devadatta.”

413. 413

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     Ekacce mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     Some officials said,

414. 414

     “कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बो,han·tab·bo देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to च,ca सब्बेsab·be चca भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा”ति।han·tab·bā

     “kumāro ca hantabbo, devadatto ca, sabbe ca bhikkhū hantabbā”ti.

     “The prince should be executed, together with Devadatta and all the monks.”

415. 415

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     Ekacce mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     Others said,

416. 416

     “नna भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा।han·tab·bā

     “na bhikkhū hantabbā.

     “The monks shouldn’t be executed.

417. 417

     नna भिक्खूbhik·khū किञ्चिkiñ·ci अपरज्झन्ति।a·pa·raj·jhan·ti

     Na bhikkhū kiñci aparajjhanti.

     They haven’t done anything wrong.

418. 418

     कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बो,han·tab·bo देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to चा”ति।cā

     Kumāro ca hantabbo, devadatto cā”ti.

     The prince should be executed, together with Devadatta.”

419. 419

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     Ekacce mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     Still others said,

420. 420

     “नna कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बो,han·tab·bo नna देवदत्तो।de·va·dat·to

     “na kumāro ca hantabbo, na devadatto.

     “Neither the prince nor Devadatta

421. 421

     नna भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा।han·tab·bā

     Na bhikkhū hantabbā.

     nor the monks should be executed.

422. 422

     रञ्ञोrañ·ño आरोचेतब्बं।ā·ro·ce·tab·baṃ

     Rañño ārocetabbaṁ.

     The king should be informed,

423. 423

     यथाya·thā राजाrā·jā वक्खतिvak·kha·ti तथाta·thā करिस्सामा”ति।ka·ris·sā·mā

     Yathā rājā vakkhati tathā karissāmā”ti.

     and we should do as he says.”

424. 424

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā अजातसत्तुंa·jā·ta·sat·tuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Atha kho te mahāmattā ajātasattuṁ kumāraṁ ādāya yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They took Ajātasattu with them and went to King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha to inform him of what had happened.

425. 425

     “कथं,ka·thaṃ भणे,bha·ṇe महामत्तेहिma·hā·mat·te·hi मतिma·ti कता”ति?ka·tā

     “Kathaṁ, bhaṇe, mahāmattehi mati katā”ti?

     The king said, “What do you all make of this?”

426. 426

     “एकच्चे,e·kac·ce देव,de·va महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     “Ekacce, deva, mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     They told him their views.

427. 427

     ‘कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बो,han·tab·bo देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to च,ca सब्बेsab·be चca भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा’ति।han·tab·bā

     ‘kumāro ca hantabbo, devadatto ca, sabbe ca bhikkhū hantabbā’ti.

     (Pāli only)

428. 428

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     Ekacce mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

429. 429

     ‘नna भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा।han·tab·bā

     ‘na bhikkhū hantabbā.

     (Pāli only)

430. 430

     नna भिक्खूbhik·khū किञ्चिkiñ·ci अपरज्झन्ति।a·pa·raj·jhan·ti

     Na bhikkhū kiñci aparajjhanti.

     (Pāli only)

431. 431

     कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बो,han·tab·bo देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to चा’ति।cā

     Kumāro ca hantabbo, devadatto cā’ti.

     (Pāli only)

432. 432

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     Ekacce mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

433. 433

     ‘नna कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बो,han·tab·bo नna देवदत्तो।de·va·dat·to

     ‘na kumāro ca hantabbo, na devadatto.

     (Pāli only)

434. 434

     नna भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा।han·tab·bā

     Na bhikkhū hantabbā.

     (Pāli only)

435. 435

     रञ्ञोrañ·ño आरोचेतब्बं।ā·ro·ce·tab·baṃ

     Rañño ārocetabbaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

436. 436

     यथाya·thā राजाrā·jā वक्खतिvak·kha·ti तथाta·thā करिस्सामा’”ति।ka·ris·sā·mā

     Yathā rājā vakkhati tathā karissāmā’”ti.

     (Pāli only)

437. 437

     “किं,kiṃ भणे,bha·ṇe करिस्सतिka·ris·sa·ti बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा?vā

     “Kiṁ, bhaṇe, karissati buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā?

     The king then said, “What’s this got to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha?

438. 438

     ननुna·nu भगवताbha·ga·va·tā पटिकच्चेवpa·ṭi·kac·ce·va देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पकासापितो—pa·kā·sā·pi·to

     Nanu bhagavatā paṭikacceva devadatto rājagahe pakāsāpito—

     Didn’t the Buddha have an announcement made in Rājagaha as a warning:

439. 439

     ‘पुब्बेpub·be देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकतिpa·ka·ti अहोसि,a·ho·si इदानिi·dā·ni अञ्ञाañ·ñā पकति।pa·ka·ti

     ‘pubbe devadattassa aññā pakati ahosi, idāni aññā pakati.

     ‘Devadatta’s character has changed.

440. 440

     यंyaṃ देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to करेय्यka·rey·ya कायेनkā·ye·na वाचाय,vā·cā·ya नna तेनte·na बुद्धोbud·dho वाvā धम्मोdham·mo वाvā सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वाvā दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo देवदत्तोवde·va·dat·to·va तेनte·na दट्ठब्बो’”ति?daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Yaṁ devadatto kareyya kāyena vācāya, na tena buddho vā dhammo vā saṅgho vā daṭṭhabbo, devadattova tena daṭṭhabbo’”ti?

     Whatever Devadatta does by body or speech has nothing to do with the Buddha, the Teaching, or the Sangha, but only with Devadatta’?”

441. 441

     तत्थtat·tha येye तेte महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     Tattha ye te mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     He then fired those officials who had suggested

442. 442

     “कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बोhan·tab·bo देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to च;ca

     “kumāro ca hantabbo devadatto ca;

     to execute the prince, Devadatta,

443. 443

     सब्बेsab·be चca भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा”ति;han·tab·bā

     sabbe ca bhikkhū hantabbā”ti;

     and the Sangha;

444. 444

     तेte अट्ठानेaṭ·ṭhā·ne अकासि।a·kā·si

     te aṭṭhāne akāsi.

     (Pāli only)

445. 445

     येye तेte महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     Ye te mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     he demoted those who had suggested

446. 446

     “नna भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा;han·tab·bā

     “na bhikkhū hantabbā;

     (Pāli only)

447. 447

     नna भिक्खूbhik·khū किञ्चिkiñ·ci अपरज्झन्ति;a·pa·raj·jhan·ti

     na bhikkhū kiñci aparajjhanti;

     (Pāli only)

448. 448

     कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बोhan·tab·bo देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to चा”ति;cā

     kumāro ca hantabbo devadatto cā”ti;

     to execute the prince and Devadatta;

449. 449

     तेte नीचेnī·ce ठानेṭhā·ne ठपेसि।ṭha·pe·si

     te nīce ṭhāne ṭhapesi.

     (Pāli only)

450. 450

     येye तेte महामत्ताma·hā·mat·tā एवंe·vaṃ मतिंma·tiṃ अकंसु—a·kaṃ·su

     Ye te mahāmattā evaṁ matiṁ akaṁsu—

     and he promoted those who had suggested

451. 451

     “नna कुमारोku·mā·ro चca हन्तब्बो,han·tab·bo नna देवदत्तो;de·va·dat·to

     “na kumāro ca hantabbo, na devadatto;

     (Pāli only)

452. 452

     नna भिक्खूbhik·khū हन्तब्बा;han·tab·bā

     na bhikkhū hantabbā;

     (Pāli only)

453. 453

     रञ्ञोrañ·ño आरोचेतब्बं;ā·ro·ce·tab·baṃ

     rañño ārocetabbaṁ;

     (Pāli only)

454. 454

     यथाya·thā राजाrā·jā वक्खतिvak·kha·ti तथाta·thā करिस्सामा”ति;ka·ris·sā·mā

     yathā rājā vakkhati tathā karissāmā”ti;

     to act according to the king’s orders.

455. 455

     तेte उच्चेuc·ce ठानेṭhā·ne ठपेसि।ṭha·pe·si

     te ucce ṭhāne ṭhapesi.

     (Pāli only)

456. 456

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro अजातसत्तुंa·jā·ta·sat·tuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro ajātasattuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     And he said to Ajātasattu,

457. 457

     “किस्सkis·sa मंmaṃ त्वं,tvaṃ कुमार,ku·mā·ra हन्तुकामोसी”ति?han·tu·kā·mo·sī

     “kissa maṁ tvaṁ, kumāra, hantukāmosī”ti?

     “Why do you want to kill me?”

458. 458

     “रज्जेनाम्हि,raj·je·nām·hi देव,de·va अत्थिको”ति।at·thi·ko

     “Rajjenāmhi, deva, atthiko”ti.

     “I want to rule, sir.”

459. 459

     “सचेsa·ce खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ कुमार,ku·mā·ra रज्जेनraj·je·na अत्थिको,at·thi·ko एतंe·taṃ तेte रज्जन्”तिraj·jan अजातसत्तुस्सa·jā·ta·sat·tus·sa कुमारस्सku·mā·ras·sa रज्जंraj·jaṃ निय्यादेसि।niy·yā·de·si

     “Sace kho tvaṁ, kumāra, rajjena atthiko, etaṁ te rajjan”ti ajātasattussa kumārassa rajjaṁ niyyādesi.

     “If you want to rule, the kingdom is yours.” And he handed the rulership over to the prince.

460. 460

     2।3। अभिमारपेसनa·bhi·mā·ra·pe·sa·na

     2.3. Abhimārapesana

     6. The sending of assassins

461. 461

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to येनye·na अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā अजातसत्तुंa·jā·ta·sat·tuṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho devadatto yena ajātasattu kumāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā ajātasattuṁ kumāraṁ etadavoca—

     Soon afterwards Devadatta went to Ajātasattu and said,

462. 462

     “पुरिसे,pu·ri·se महाराज,ma·hā·rā·ja आणापेहि,ā·ṇā·pe·hi येye समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेस्सन्ती”ति।vo·ro·pes·san·tī

     “purise, mahārāja, āṇāpehi, ye samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ jīvitā voropessantī”ti.

     “Great king, please order your men to kill the ascetic Gotama.”

463. 463

     अथa·tha खोkho अजातसत्तुa·jā·ta·sat·tu कुमारोku·mā·ro मनुस्सेma·nus·se आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho ajātasattu kumāro manusse āṇāpesi—

     And the king told his men,

464. 464

     “यथा,ya·thā भणे,bha·ṇe अय्योay·yo देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आहā·ha तथाta·thā करेय्याथा”ति।ka·rey·yā·thā

     “yathā, bhaṇe, ayyo devadatto āha tathā kareyyāthā”ti.

     “Do as Venerable Devadatta says.”

465. 465

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to एकंe·kaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho devadatto ekaṁ purisaṁ āṇāpesi—

     Devadatta then told one man,

466. 466

     “गच्छावुसो,gac·chā·vu·so अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ ओकासेo·kā·se समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     “gacchāvuso, amukasmiṁ okāse samaṇo gotamo viharati.

     “Go to such and such a place where the ascetic Gotama is staying.

467. 467

     तंtaṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेत्वाvo·ro·pet·vā इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na आगच्छा”ति।ā·gac·chā

     Taṁ jīvitā voropetvā iminā maggena āgacchā”ti.

     Kill him and return via that path.”

468. 468

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ मग्गेmag·ge द्वेdve पुरिसेpu·ri·se ठपेसि—ṭha·pe·si

     Tasmiṁ magge dve purise ṭhapesi—

     On that path he stationed two men, saying,

469. 469

     “योyo इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na एकोe·ko पुरिसोpu·ri·so आगच्छति,ā·gac·cha·ti तंtaṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेत्वाvo·ro·pet·vā इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na आगच्छथा”ति।ā·gac·cha·thā

     “yo iminā maggena eko puriso āgacchati, taṁ jīvitā voropetvā iminā maggena āgacchathā”ti.

     “Kill the man who comes along this path and return via that path.”

470. 470

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ मग्गेmag·ge चत्तारोcat·tā·ro पुरिसेpu·ri·se ठपेसि—ṭha·pe·si

     Tasmiṁ magge cattāro purise ṭhapesi—

     On that path he stationed four men, saying,

471. 471

     “येye इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na द्वेdve पुरिसाpu·ri·sā आगच्छन्ति,ā·gac·chan·ti तेte जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेत्वाvo·ro·pet·vā इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na आगच्छथा”ति।ā·gac·cha·thā

     “ye iminā maggena dve purisā āgacchanti, te jīvitā voropetvā iminā maggena āgacchathā”ti.

     “Kill the two men who come along this path and return via that path.”

472. 472

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ मग्गेmag·ge अट्ठaṭ·ṭha पुरिसेpu·ri·se ठपेसि—ṭha·pe·si

     Tasmiṁ magge aṭṭha purise ṭhapesi—

     On that path he stationed eight men, saying,

473. 473

     “येye इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na चत्तारोcat·tā·ro पुरिसाpu·ri·sā आगच्छन्ति,ā·gac·chan·ti तेte जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेत्वाvo·ro·pet·vā इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na आगच्छथा”ति।ā·gac·cha·thā

     “ye iminā maggena cattāro purisā āgacchanti, te jīvitā voropetvā iminā maggena āgacchathā”ti.

     “Kill the four men who come along this path and return via that path.”

474. 474

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ मग्गेmag·ge सोळसso·ḷa·sa पुरिसेpu·ri·se ठपेसि—ṭha·pe·si

     Tasmiṁ magge soḷasa purise ṭhapesi—

     On that path he stationed sixteen men, saying,

475. 475

     “येye इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na अट्ठaṭ·ṭha पुरिसाpu·ri·sā आगच्छन्ति,ā·gac·chan·ti तेte जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेत्वाvo·ro·pet·vā आगच्छथा”ति।ā·gac·cha·thā

     “ye iminā maggena aṭṭha purisā āgacchanti, te jīvitā voropetvā āgacchathā”ti.

     “Kill the eight men who come along this path and then return.”

476. 476

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso एकोe·ko पुरिसोpu·ri·so असिचम्मंa·si·cam·maṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā धनुकलापंdha·nu·ka·lā·paṃ सन्नय्हित्वाsan·nay·hit·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अविदूरेa·vi·dū·re भीतोbhī·to उब्बिग्गोub·big·go उस्सङ्कीus·saṅ·kī उत्रस्तोut·ras·to पत्थद्धेनpat·thad·dhe·na कायेनkā·ye·na अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho so eko puriso asicammaṁ gahetvā dhanukalāpaṁ sannayhitvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato avidūre bhīto ubbiggo ussaṅkī utrasto patthaddhena kāyena aṭṭhāsi.

     Soon afterwards that one man armed himself with a bow and arrows, as well as a sword and shield, and went to the Buddha. As he got close, he became fearful and agitated, standing rigidly.

477. 477

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ भीतंbhī·taṃ उब्बिग्गंub·big·gaṃ उस्सङ्किंus·saṅ·kiṃ उत्रस्तंut·ras·taṃ पत्थद्धेनpat·thad·dhe·na कायेनkā·ye·na ठितं।ṭhi·taṃ

     Addasā kho bhagavā taṁ purisaṁ bhītaṁ ubbiggaṁ ussaṅkiṁ utrastaṁ patthaddhena kāyena ṭhitaṁ.

     The Buddha saw him

478. 478

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Disvāna taṁ purisaṁ etadavoca—

     and said,

479. 479

     “एहावुसो,e·hā·vu·so माmā भायी”ति।bhā·yī

     “ehāvuso, mā bhāyī”ti.

     “Come, don’t be afraid.”

480. 480

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso पुरिसोpu·ri·so असिचम्मंa·si·cam·maṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā धनुकलापंdha·nu·ka·lā·paṃ निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पादेसुpā·de·su सिरसाsi·ra·sā निपतित्वाni·pa·tit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so puriso asicammaṁ ekamantaṁ karitvā dhanukalāpaṁ nikkhipitvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     He then placed his sword and shield to one side, put down his bow and arrows, and went up to the Buddha. He bowed down with his head at the Buddha’s feet, and said,

481. 481

     “अच्चयोac·ca·yo मं,maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अच्चगमाac·ca·ga·mā यथाबालंya·thā·bā·laṃ यथामूळ्हंya·thā·mū·ḷhaṃ यथाअकुसलं,ya·thā·a·ku·sa·laṃ योहंyo·haṃ दुट्ठचित्तोduṭ·ṭha·cit·to वधकचित्तोva·dha·ka·cit·to इधूपसङ्कन्तो।i·dhū·pa·saṅ·kan·to

     “accayo maṁ, bhante, accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yohaṁ duṭṭhacitto vadhakacitto idhūpasaṅkanto.

     “Sir, I’ve made a mistake. I’ve been foolish, confused, and unskillful in coming here with a malicious mind intent on murder.

482. 482

     तस्सtas·sa मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā अच्चयंac·ca·yaṃ अच्चयतोac·ca·ya·to पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ संवराया”ति।saṃ·va·rā·yā

     Tassa me, bhante, bhagavā accayaṁ accayato paṭiggaṇhātu āyatiṁ saṁvarāyā”ti.

     Please forgive me so that I may restrain myself in the future.”

483. 483

     “तग्घtag·gha त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अच्चयोac·ca·yo अच्चगमाac·ca·ga·mā यथाबालंya·thā·bā·laṃ यथामूळ्हंya·thā·mū·ḷhaṃ यथाअकुसलं,ya·thā·a·ku·sa·laṃ यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ दुट्ठचित्तोduṭ·ṭha·cit·to वधकचित्तोva·dha·ka·cit·to इधूपसङ्कन्तो।i·dhū·pa·saṅ·kan·to

     “Taggha tvaṁ, āvuso, accayo accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ duṭṭhacitto vadhakacitto idhūpasaṅkanto.

     “You have certainly made a mistake. You’ve been foolish, confused, and unskillful.

484. 484

     यतोya·to चca खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अच्चयंac·ca·yaṃ अच्चयतोac·ca·ya·to दिस्वाdis·vā यथाधम्मंya·thā·dham·maṃ पटिकरोसि,pa·ṭi·ka·ro·si तंtaṃ तेte मयंma·yaṃ पटिग्गण्हाम।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·ma

     Yato ca kho tvaṁ, āvuso, accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikarosi, taṁ te mayaṁ paṭiggaṇhāma.

     But since you acknowledge your mistake and make proper amends, I forgive you.

485. 485

     वुड्ढिvuḍ·ḍhi हेसा,he·sā आवुसो,ā·vu·so अरियस्सa·ri·yas·sa विनये—vi·na·ye

     Vuḍḍhi hesā, āvuso, ariyassa vinaye—

     For this is called growth in the training of the noble ones:

486. 486

     योyo अच्चयंac·ca·yaṃ अच्चयतोac·ca·ya·to दिस्वाdis·vā यथाधम्मंya·thā·dham·maṃ पटिकरोति,pa·ṭi·ka·ro·ti आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ संवरंsaṃ·va·raṃ आपज्जती”ति।ā·paj·ja·tī

     yo accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikaroti, āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjatī”ti.

     acknowledging a mistake, making proper amends, and undertaking restraint for the future.”

487. 487

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa अनुपुब्बिंa·nu·pub·biṃ कथंka·thaṃ कथेसि,ka·the·si सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

     Atha kho bhagavā tassa purisassa anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—

     The Buddha then gave him a progressive talk—

488. 488

     दानकथंdā·na·ka·thaṃ सीलकथंsī·la·ka·thaṃ सग्गकथं,sag·ga·ka·thaṃ कामानंkā·mā·naṃ आदीनवंā·dī·na·vaṃ ओकारंo·kā·raṃ सङ्किलेसं,saṅ·ki·le·saṃ नेक्खम्मेnek·kham·me आनिसंसंā·ni·saṃ·saṃ पकासेसि।pa·kā·se·si

     dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ, kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi.

     on generosity, morality, and heaven; on the downside, degradation, and defilement of worldly pleasures; and he revealed the benefits of renunciation.

489. 489

     यदाya·dā तंtaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā अञ्ञासिañ·ñā·si कल्लचित्तं,kal·la·cit·taṃ मुदुचित्तं,mu·du·cit·taṃ विनीवरणचित्तं,vi·nī·va·ra·ṇa·cit·taṃ उदग्गचित्तं,u·dag·ga·cit·taṃ पसन्नचित्तं,pa·san·na·cit·taṃ अथa·tha याyā बुद्धानंbud·dhā·naṃ सामुक्कंसिकाsā·muk·kaṃ·si·kā धम्मदेसनाdham·ma·de·sa·nā तंtaṃ पकासेसि—pa·kā·se·si

     Yadā taṁ bhagavā aññāsi kallacittaṁ, muducittaṁ, vinīvaraṇacittaṁ, udaggacittaṁ, pasannacittaṁ, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā taṁ pakāsesi—

     When the Buddha knew that his mind was ready, supple, without hindrances, joyful, and confident, he revealed the teaching unique to the Buddhas:

490. 490

     दुक्खं,duk·khaṃ समुदयं,sa·mu·da·yaṃ निरोधं,ni·ro·dhaṃ मग्गं।mag·gaṃ

     dukkhaṁ, samudayaṁ, nirodhaṁ, maggaṁ.

     suffering, its origin, its end, and the path.

491. 491

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma सुद्धंsud·dhaṃ वत्थंvat·thaṃ अपगतकाळकंa·pa·ga·ta·kā·ḷa·kaṃ सम्मदेवsam·ma·de·va रजनंra·ja·naṃ पटिग्गहेय्य;pa·ṭig·ga·hey·ya

     Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaheyya;

     And just as a clean and stainless cloth absorbs dye properly,

492. 492

     एवमेवe·va·me·va तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa तस्मिंयेवtas·miṃ·ye·va आसनेā·sa·ne विरजंvi·ra·jaṃ वीतमलंvī·ta·ma·laṃ धम्मचक्खुंdham·ma·cak·khuṃ उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

     evameva tassa purisassa tasmiṁyeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi—

     so too, while he was sitting right there, he experienced the stainless vision of the Truth:

493. 493

     “यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci समुदयधम्मंsa·mu·da·ya·dham·maṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ निरोधधम्मन्”ति।ni·ro·dha·dham·man

     “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.

     “Anything that has a beginning has an end.”

494. 494

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso पुरिसोpu·ri·so दिट्ठधम्मोdiṭ·ṭha·dham·mo पत्तधम्मोpat·ta·dham·mo विदितधम्मोvi·di·ta·dham·mo परियोगाळ्हधम्मोpa·ri·yo·gā·ḷha·dham·mo तिण्णविचिकिच्छोtiṇ·ṇa·vi·ci·kic·cho विगतकथङ्कथोvi·ga·ta·ka·thaṅ·ka·tho वेसारज्जप्पत्तोve·sā·raj·jap·pat·to अपरप्पच्चयोa·pa·rap·pac·ca·yo सत्थुसासनेsat·thu·sā·sa·ne भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so puriso diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     He had seen the Truth, had reached, understood, and penetrated it. He had gone beyond doubt and uncertainty, had attained to confidence, and had become independent of others in the Teacher’s instruction. And he said to the Buddha,

495. 495

     “अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्ते।bhan·te

     “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante.

     “Wonderful, sir, wonderful!

496. 496

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भन्ते,bhan·te निक्कुज्जितंnik·kuj·ji·taṃ वाvā उक्कुज्जेय्य,uk·kuj·jey·ya पटिच्छन्नंpa·ṭic·chan·naṃ वाvā विवरेय्य,vi·va·rey·ya मूळ्हस्सmū·ḷhas·sa वाvā मग्गंmag·gaṃ आचिक्खेय्य,ā·cik·khey·ya अन्धकारेan·dha·kā·re वाvā तेलपज्जोतंte·la·paj·jo·taṃ धारेय्य—dhā·rey·ya

     Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya—

     Just as one might set upright what’s overturned, or reveal what’s hidden, or show the way to one who’s lost, or bring a lamp into the dark

497. 497

     ‘चक्खुमन्तोcak·khu·man·to रूपानिrū·pā·ni दक्खन्ती’ति—dak·khan·tī

     ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti—

     so that one with eyes might see what’s there—

498. 498

     एवमेवंe·va·me·vaṃ भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na धम्मोdham·mo पकासितो।pa·kā·si·to

     evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito.

     just so has the Buddha made the Teaching clear in many ways.

499. 499

     एसाहं,e·sā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गच्छामि,gac·chā·mi धम्मञ्च,dham·mañ·ca भिक्खुसङ्घञ्च।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghañ·ca

     Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi, dhammañca, bhikkhusaṅghañca.

     I go for refuge to the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Sangha of monks.

500. 500

     उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ मंmaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गतन्”ति।ga·tan

     Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.

     Please accept me as a lay follower who’s gone for refuge for life.”

501. 501

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho bhagavā taṁ purisaṁ etadavoca—

     The Buddha then said to him,

502. 502

     “माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na गच्छ,gac·cha इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na गच्छाही”तिgac·chā·hī अञ्ञेनañ·ñe·na मग्गेनmag·ge·na उय्योजेसि।uy·yo·je·si

     “mā kho tvaṁ, āvuso, iminā maggena gaccha, iminā maggena gacchāhī”ti aññena maggena uyyojesi.

     “Don’t go back along this path, go along that one.” And he sent him down a different path.

503. 503

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte द्वेdve पुरिसा—pu·ri·sā

     Atha kho te dve purisā—

     The two men thought,

504. 504

     “किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho सोso एकोe·ko पुरिसोpu·ri·so चिरेनci·re·na आगच्छती”ति—ā·gac·cha·tī

     “kiṁ nu kho so eko puriso cirena āgacchatī”ti—

     “Why is it taking that one man so long to arrive?”

505. 505

     पटिपथंpa·ṭi·pa·thaṃ गच्छन्ताgac·chan·tā अद्दसासुंad·da·sā·suṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अञ्ञतरस्मिंañ·ña·ta·ras·miṃ रुक्खमूलेruk·kha·mū·le निसिन्नं।ni·sin·naṃ

     paṭipathaṁ gacchantā addasāsuṁ bhagavantaṁ aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisinnaṁ.

     As they were walking along that path in the opposite direction, they saw the Buddha seated at the foot of a tree.

506. 506

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Disvāna yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     They approached him, bowed, and sat down.

507. 507

     तेसंte·saṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बिंa·nu·pub·biṃ कथंka·thaṃ कथेसिka·the·si …पे…pe

     Tesaṁ bhagavā anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi …pe…

     The Buddha gave them a progressive talk …

508. 508

     अपरप्पच्चयाa·pa·rap·pac·ca·yā सत्थुसासनेsat·thu·sā·sa·ne भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     aparappaccayā satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and they had become independent of others in the Teacher’s instruction. And they said to the Buddha,

509. 509

     “अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्तेbhan·te …पे…pe

     “abhikkantaṁ, bhante …pe…

     “Wonderful, sir …

510. 510

     उपासकेu·pā·sa·ke नोno भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गते”ति।ga·te

     upāsake no bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gate”ti.

     Please accept us as lay followers who have gone for refuge for life.”

511. 511

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte पुरिसेpu·ri·se एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho bhagavā te purise etadavoca—

     The Buddha then said to them,

512. 512

     “माmā खोkho तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na गच्छित्थ,gac·chit·tha इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na गच्छथा”तिgac·cha·thā अञ्ञेनañ·ñe·na मग्गेनmag·ge·na उय्योजेसि।uy·yo·je·si

     “mā kho tumhe, āvuso, iminā maggena gacchittha, iminā maggena gacchathā”ti aññena maggena uyyojesi.

     “Don’t go back along this path, go along that one.” And he sent them down a different path.

513. 513

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte चत्तारोcat·tā·ro पुरिसाpu·ri·sā …पे…pe

     Atha kho te cattāro purisā …pe…

     The four men …

514. 514

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte अट्ठaṭ·ṭha पुरिसाpu·ri·sā …पे…pe

     atha kho te aṭṭha purisā …pe…

     the eight men …

515. 515

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte सोळसso·ḷa·sa पुरिसा—pu·ri·sā

     atha kho te soḷasa purisā—

     the sixteen men thought,

516. 516

     किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho तेte अट्ठaṭ·ṭha पुरिसाpu·ri·sā चिरेनci·re·na आगच्छन्तीति—ā·gac·chan·tī·ti

     kiṁ nu kho te aṭṭha purisā cirena āgacchantīti—

     “Why is it taking those eight men so long to arrive?”

517. 517

     पटिपथंpa·ṭi·pa·thaṃ गच्छन्ताgac·chan·tā अद्दसासुंad·da·sā·suṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अञ्ञतरस्मिंañ·ña·ta·ras·miṃ रुक्खमूलेruk·kha·mū·le निसिन्नं।ni·sin·naṃ

     paṭipathaṁ gacchantā addasāsuṁ bhagavantaṁ aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisinnaṁ.

     As they were walking along that path in the opposite direction, they saw the Buddha seated at the foot of a tree.

518. 518

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Disvāna yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     They approached him, bowed, and sat down.

519. 519

     तेसंte·saṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बिंa·nu·pub·biṃ कथंka·thaṃ कथेसि,ka·the·si सेय्यथिदं—sey·ya·thi·daṃ

     Tesaṁ bhagavā anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ—

     The Buddha gave them a progressive talk …

520. 520

     दानकथंdā·na·ka·thaṃ …पे…pe

     dānakathaṁ …pe…

     (Pāli only)

521. 521

     अपरप्पच्चयाa·pa·rap·pac·ca·yā सत्थुसासनेsat·thu·sā·sa·ne भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     aparappaccayā satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and they had become independent of others in the Teacher’s instruction. And they said to the Buddha,

522. 522

     “अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भन्तेbhan·te …पे…pe

     “abhikkantaṁ, bhante …pe…

     “Wonderful, sir …

523. 523

     उपासकेu·pā·sa·ke नोno भगवाbha·ga·vā धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गते”ति।ga·te

     upāsake no bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gate”ti.

     Please accept us as lay followers who have gone for refuge for life.”

524. 524

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तेte पुरिसेpu·ri·se एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho bhagavā te purise etadavoca—

     (Pāli only)

525. 525

     “माmā खोkho तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na गच्छित्थ,gac·chit·tha इमिनाi·mi·nā मग्गेनmag·ge·na गच्छथा”तिgac·cha·thā अञ्ञेनañ·ñe·na मग्गेनmag·ge·na उय्योजेसि।uy·yo·je·si

     “mā kho tumhe, āvuso, iminā maggena gacchittha, iminā maggena gacchathā”ti aññena maggena uyyojesi.

     (Pāli only)

526. 526

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso एकोe·ko पुरिसोpu·ri·so येनye·na देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so eko puriso yena devadatto tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā devadattaṁ etadavoca—

     Soon afterwards that one man went to Devadatta and said,

527. 527

     “नाहं,nā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi तंtaṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेतुं;vo·ro·pe·tuṃ

     “nāhaṁ, bhante, sakkomi taṁ bhagavantaṁ jīvitā voropetuṁ;

     “I wasn’t able to kill him, sir.

528. 528

     महिद्धिकोma·hid·dhi·ko सोso भगवाbha·ga·vā महानुभावो”ति।ma·hā·nu·bhā·vo

     mahiddhiko so bhagavā mahānubhāvo”ti.

     He’s powerful and mighty, that Buddha.”

529. 529

     “अलं,a·laṃ आवुसो;ā·vu·so

     “Alaṁ, āvuso;

     “Never mind.

530. 530

     माmā त्वंtvaṃ समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेसि।vo·ro·pe·si

     mā tvaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ jīvitā voropesi.

     There’s no need for you to kill the ascetic Gotama.

531. 531

     अहमेवa·ha·me·va समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेस्सामी”ति।vo·ro·pes·sā·mī

     Ahameva samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ jīvitā voropessāmī”ti.

     I’ll do it myself.”

532. 532

     2।4। लोहितुप्पादककम्मlo·hi·tup·pā·da·ka·kam·ma

     2.4. Lohituppādakakamma

     7. Causing the Buddha to bleed

533. 533

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā गिज्झकूटस्सgij·jha·kū·ṭas·sa पब्बतस्सpab·ba·tas·sa छायायंchā·yā·yaṃ चङ्कमति।caṅ·ka·ma·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā gijjhakūṭassa pabbatassa chāyāyaṁ caṅkamati.

     Soon afterwards the Buddha was doing walking meditation in the shade of the Vulture Peak.

534. 534

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to गिज्झकूटंgij·jha·kū·ṭaṃ पब्बतंpab·ba·taṃ आरुहित्वाā·ru·hit·vā महतिंma·ha·tiṃ सिलंsi·laṃ पविज्झि—pa·vij·jhi

     Atha kho devadatto gijjhakūṭaṁ pabbataṁ āruhitvā mahatiṁ silaṁ pavijjhi—

     Devadatta climbed the peak and threw down a large stone, thinking,

535. 535

     इमायi·mā·ya समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेस्सामीति।vo·ro·pes·sā·mī·ti

     imāya samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ jīvitā voropessāmīti.

     “With this I’ll kill the ascetic Gotama.”

536. 536

     द्वेdve पब्बतकूटाpab·ba·ta·kū·ṭā समागन्त्वाsa·mā·gan·tvā तंtaṃ सिलंsi·laṃ सम्पटिच्छिंसु।sam·pa·ṭic·chiṃ·su

     Dve pabbatakūṭā samāgantvā taṁ silaṁ sampaṭicchiṁsu.

     But the stone got stuck in the junction of two outcrops.

537. 537

     ततोta·to पपतिकाpa·pa·ti·kā उप्पतित्वाup·pa·tit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पादेpā·de रुहिरंru·hi·raṃ उप्पादेसि।up·pā·de·si

     Tato papatikā uppatitvā bhagavato pāde ruhiraṁ uppādesi.

     A chip flew off, striking the Buddha’s foot and causing him to bleed.

538. 538

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उद्धंud·dhaṃ उल्लोकेत्वाul·lo·ket·vā देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho bhagavā uddhaṁ ulloketvā devadattaṁ etadavoca—

     The Buddha looked up and said to Devadatta,

539. 539

     “बहुंba·huṃ तया,ta·yā मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अपुञ्ञंa·puñ·ñaṃ पसुतं,pa·su·taṃ यंyaṃ त्वंtvaṃ दुट्ठचित्तोduṭ·ṭha·cit·to वधकचित्तोva·dha·ka·cit·to तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa रुहिरंru·hi·raṃ उप्पादेसी”ति।up·pā·de·sī

     “bahuṁ tayā, moghapurisa, apuññaṁ pasutaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ duṭṭhacitto vadhakacitto tathāgatassa ruhiraṁ uppādesī”ti.

     “Foolish man, you’ve made much demerit. With a malicious mind intent on murder you’ve made the Buddha bleed.”

540. 540

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha addressed the monks:

541. 541

     “इदं,i·daṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve देवदत्तेनde·va·dat·te·na पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ आनन्तरियंā·nan·ta·ri·yaṃ कम्मंkam·maṃ उपचितं,u·pa·ci·taṃ यंyaṃ दुट्ठचित्तेनduṭ·ṭha·cit·te·na वधकचित्तेनva·dha·ka·cit·te·na तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa रुहिरंru·hi·raṃ उप्पादितन्”ति।up·pā·di·tan

     “idaṁ, bhikkhave, devadattena paṭhamaṁ ānantariyaṁ kammaṁ upacitaṁ, yaṁ duṭṭhacittena vadhakacittena tathāgatassa ruhiraṁ uppāditan”ti.

     “With a malicious mind intent on murder Devadatta has made the Buddha bleed. This is his first action with consequences in his very next life.”

542. 542

     अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho भिक्खू—bhik·khū

     Assosuṁ kho bhikkhū—

     When the monks heard

543. 543

     “देवदत्तेनde·va·dat·te·na किरki·ra भगवतोbha·ga·va·to वधोva·dho पयुत्तो”ति।pa·yut·to

     “devadattena kira bhagavato vadho payutto”ti.

     that Devadatta was trying to murder the Buddha,

544. 544

     तेte चca भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to विहारस्सvi·hā·ras·sa परितोpa·ri·to परितोpa·ri·to चङ्कमन्तिcaṅ·ka·man·ti उच्चासद्दाuc·cā·sad·dā महासद्दाma·hā·sad·dā सज्झायंsaj·jhā·yaṃ करोन्ता,ka·ron·tā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to रक्खावरणगुत्तिया।rak·khā·va·ra·ṇa·gut·ti·yā

     Te ca bhikkhū bhagavato vihārassa parito parito caṅkamanti uccāsaddā mahāsaddā sajjhāyaṁ karontā, bhagavato rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā.

     they walked back and forth on all sides of the Buddha’s dwelling, trying to protect him by reciting loudly.

545. 545

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उच्चासद्दंuc·cā·sad·daṃ महासद्दंma·hā·sad·daṃ सज्झायसद्दं।saj·jhā·ya·sad·daṃ

     Assosi kho bhagavā uccāsaddaṁ mahāsaddaṁ sajjhāyasaddaṁ.

     The Buddha heard that loud sound of recitation.

546. 546

     सुत्वानsut·vā·na आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Sutvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

     He asked Ānanda what it was,

547. 547

     “किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho सो,so आनन्द,ā·nan·da उच्चासद्दोuc·cā·sad·do महासद्दोma·hā·sad·do सज्झायसद्दो”ति?saj·jhā·ya·sad·do

     “kiṁ nu kho so, ānanda, uccāsaddo mahāsaddo sajjhāyasaddo”ti?

     (Pāli only)

548. 548

     “अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खू—bhik·khū

     “Assosuṁ kho, bhante, bhikkhū—

     and Ānanda told him.

549. 549

     ‘देवदत्तेनde·va·dat·te·na किरki·ra भगवतोbha·ga·va·to वधोva·dho पयुत्तो’ति।pa·yut·to

     ‘devadattena kira bhagavato vadho payutto’ti.

     (Pāli only)

550. 550

     तेte च,ca भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to विहारस्सvi·hā·ras·sa परितोpa·ri·to परितोpa·ri·to चङ्कमन्तिcaṅ·ka·man·ti उच्चासद्दाuc·cā·sad·dā महासद्दाma·hā·sad·dā सज्झायंsaj·jhā·yaṃ करोन्ता,ka·ron·tā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to रक्खावरणगुत्तिया।rak·khā·va·ra·ṇa·gut·ti·yā

     Te ca, bhante, bhikkhū bhagavato vihārassa parito parito caṅkamanti uccāsaddā mahāsaddā sajjhāyaṁ karontā, bhagavato rakkhāvaraṇaguttiyā.

     (Pāli only)

551. 551

     सोso एसो,e·so भगवा,bha·ga·vā उच्चासद्दोuc·cā·sad·do महासद्दोma·hā·sad·do सज्झायसद्दो”ति।saj·jhā·ya·sad·do

     So eso, bhagavā, uccāsaddo mahāsaddo sajjhāyasaddo”ti.

     (Pāli only)

552. 552

     “तेनte·na हानन्द,hā·nan·da ममma·ma वचनेनva·ca·ne·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेहि—ā·man·te·hi

     “Tena hānanda, mama vacanena te bhikkhū āmantehi—

     The Buddha said, “Well then, Ānanda, tell those monks in my name

553. 553

     सत्थाsat·thā आयस्मन्तेā·yas·man·te आमन्तेती”ति।ā·man·te·tī

     satthā āyasmante āmantetī”ti.

     that the Teacher calls them.”

554. 554

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca—

     Saying, “Yes, sir,” he did just that.

555. 555

     “सत्थाsat·thā आयस्मन्तेā·yas·man·te आमन्तेती”ति।ā·man·te·tī

     “satthā āyasmante āmantetī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

556. 556

     “एवमावुसो”तिe·va·mā·vu·so खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     “Evamāvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato ānandassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     The monks consented. They then went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down.

557. 557

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नेni·sin·ne खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवाbha·ga·vā एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho te bhikkhū bhagavā etadavoca—

     The Buddha said to them:

558. 558

     “अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ परूपक्कमेनpa·rū·pak·ka·me·na तथागतंta·thā·ga·taṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेय्य।vo·ro·pey·ya

     “Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṁ parūpakkamena tathāgataṁ jīvitā voropeyya.

     “It’s impossible, monks, for anyone to kill me through an act of violence.

559. 559

     अनुपक्कमेन,a·nu·pak·ka·me·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तथागताta·thā·ga·tā परिनिब्बायन्ति।pa·ri·nib·bā·yan·ti

     Anupakkamena, bhikkhave, tathāgatā parinibbāyanti.

     The Buddha won’t attain final extinguishment through an act of violence.

560. 560

     पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सत्थारोsat·thā·ro सन्तोsan·to संविज्जमानाsaṃ·vij·ja·mā·nā लोकस्मिं।lo·kas·miṃ

     Pañcime, bhikkhave, satthāro santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ.

     Monks, there are five kinds of teachers in the world.

561. 561

     कतमेka·ta·me पञ्च?pañ·ca

     Katame pañca?

     (Pāli only)

562. 562

     इध,i·dha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve एकच्चोe·kac·co सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धसीलोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lo समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धसीलोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti ‘परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme सीलंsī·laṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco satthā aparisuddhasīlo samāno ‘parisuddhasīlomhī’ti paṭijānāti ‘parisuddhaṁ me sīlaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan’ti ca.

     One kind of teacher is impure in behavior, while claiming to be pure.

563. 563

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ सावकाsā·va·kā एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—jā·nan·ti

     Tamenaṁ sāvakā evaṁ jānanti—

     His disciples know about this,

564. 564

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho भवंbha·vaṃ सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धसीलोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lo समानोsa·mā·no “परिसुद्धसीलोम्ही”तिpa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti “परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme सीलंsī·laṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्”तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā aparisuddhasīlo samāno “parisuddhasīlomhī”ti paṭijānāti “parisuddhaṁ me sīlaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan”ti ca.

     (Pāli only)

565. 565

     मयञ्चेवma·yañ·ce·va खोkho पनpa·na गिहीनंgi·hī·naṃ आरोचेय्याम,ā·ro·cey·yā·ma नास्सस्सnās·sas·sa मनापं।ma·nā·paṃ

     Mayañceva kho pana gihīnaṁ āroceyyāma, nāssassa manāpaṁ.

     but think, ‘It would be unpleasant for him if we inform the householders.

566. 566

     यंyaṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa अमनापं,a·ma·nā·paṃ कथंka·thaṃ नंnaṃ मयंma·yaṃ तेनte·na समुदाचरेय्याम?sa·mu·dā·ca·rey·yā·ma

     Yaṁ kho panassa amanāpaṁ, kathaṁ naṁ mayaṁ tena samudācareyyāma?

     (Pāli only)

567. 567

     सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti खोkho पनpa·na चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारेन—cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·re·na

     Sammannati kho pana cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārena—

     And it’s because of him that we’re honored with gifts of robe-cloth, almsfood, dwellings, and medicinal supplies. How, then, can we inform them?

568. 568

     यंyaṃ तुमोtu·mo करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti तुमोवtu·mo·va तेनte·na पञ्ञायिस्सती’ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

     yaṁ tumo karissati, tumova tena paññāyissatī’ti.

     He’ll be known through his own actions.’

569. 569

     एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सत्थारंsat·thā·raṃ सावकाsā·va·kā सीलतोsī·la·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Evarūpaṁ kho, bhikkhave, satthāraṁ sāvakā sīlato rakkhanti;

     The disciples conceal the impure behavior of such a teacher,

570. 570

     एवरूपोe·va·rū·po चca पनpa·na सत्थाsat·thā सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi सीलतोsī·la·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     evarūpo ca pana satthā sāvakehi sīlato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsati.

     and the teacher expects them to do so.

571. 571

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धाजीवोa·pa·ri·sud·dhā·jī·vo समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, idhekacco satthā aparisuddhājīvo samāno …pe…

     Another kind of teacher is impure in livelihood …

572. 572

     अपरिसुद्धधम्मदेसनोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·dham·ma·de·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     aparisuddhadhammadesano samāno …pe…

     gives impure teachings …

573. 573

     अपरिसुद्धवेय्याकरणोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·vey·yā·ka·ra·ṇo समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     aparisuddhaveyyākaraṇo samāno …pe…

     gives impure explanations …

574. 574

     अपरिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·nom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti ‘परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme ञाणदस्सनंñā·ṇa·das·sa·naṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     aparisuddhañāṇadassano samāno ‘parisuddhañāṇadassanomhī’ti paṭijānāti ‘parisuddhaṁ me ñāṇadassanaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan’ti ca.

     has impure knowledge and vision, while claiming they’re pure.

575. 575

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ सावकाsā·va·kā एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति—jā·nan·ti

     Tamenaṁ sāvakā evaṁ jānanti—

     His disciples know about this,

576. 576

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho भवंbha·vaṃ सत्थाsat·thā अपरिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोa·pa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no “परिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोम्ही”तिpa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·nom·hī पटिजानातिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti “परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme ञाणदस्सनंñā·ṇa·das·sa·naṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्”तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ satthā aparisuddhañāṇadassano samāno “parisuddhañāṇadassanomhī”ti paṭijānāti “parisuddhaṁ me ñāṇadassanaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan”ti ca.

     (Pāli only)

577. 577

     मयञ्चेवma·yañ·ce·va खोkho पनpa·na गिहीनंgi·hī·naṃ आरोचेय्याम,ā·ro·cey·yā·ma नास्सस्सnās·sas·sa मनापं।ma·nā·paṃ

     Mayañceva kho pana gihīnaṁ āroceyyāma, nāssassa manāpaṁ.

     but think, ‘It would be unpleasant for him if we inform the householders.

578. 578

     यंyaṃ खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa अमनापं,a·ma·nā·paṃ कथंka·thaṃ नna मयंma·yaṃ तेनte·na समुदाचरेय्याम?sa·mu·dā·ca·rey·yā·ma

     Yaṁ kho panassa amanāpaṁ, kathaṁ na mayaṁ tena samudācareyyāma?

     (Pāli only)

579. 579

     सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti खोkho पनpa·na चीवरपिण्डपातसेनासनगिलानप्पच्चयभेसज्जपरिक्खारेन—cī·va·ra·piṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·se·nā·sa·na·gi·lā·nap·pac·ca·ya·bhe·saj·ja·pa·rik·khā·re·na

     Sammannati kho pana cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārena—

     And it’s because of him that we’re honored with gifts of robe-cloth, almsfood, dwellings, and medicinal supplies. How, then, can we inform them?

580. 580

     यंyaṃ तुमोtu·mo करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti तुमोवtu·mo·va तेनte·na पञ्ञायिस्सती’ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

     yaṁ tumo karissati, tumova tena paññāyissatī’ti.

     He’ll be known through his own actions.’

581. 581

     एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सत्थारंsat·thā·raṃ सावकाsā·va·kā ञाणदस्सनतोñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Evarūpaṁ kho, bhikkhave, satthāraṁ sāvakā ñāṇadassanato rakkhanti;

     The disciples conceal the impure knowledge and vision of such a teacher,

582. 582

     एवरूपोe·va·rū·po चca पनpa·na सत्थाsat·thā सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi ञाणदस्सनतोñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसति।pac·cā·sī·sa·ti

     evarūpo ca pana satthā sāvakehi ñāṇadassanato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsati.

     and the teacher expects them to do so.

583. 583

     इमेi·me खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca सत्थारोsat·thā·ro सन्तोsan·to संविज्जमानाsaṃ·vij·ja·mā·nā लोकस्मिं।lo·kas·miṃ

     Ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca satthāro santo saṁvijjamānā lokasmiṁ.

     (Pāli only)

584. 584

     अहंa·haṃ खोkho पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिसुद्धसीलोpa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lo समानोsa·mā·no ‘परिसुद्धसीलोम्ही’तिpa·ri·sud·dha·sī·lom·hī पटिजानामिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·mi ‘परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme सीलंsī·laṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्’तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च।ca

     Ahaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, parisuddhasīlo samāno ‘parisuddhasīlomhī’ti paṭijānāmi ‘parisuddhaṁ me sīlaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan’ti ca.

     But in my case, I claim my behavior is pure because it is.

585. 585

     नna चca मंmaṃ सावकाsā·va·kā सीलतोsī·la·to रक्खन्ति;rak·khan·ti

     Na ca maṁ sāvakā sīlato rakkhanti;

     My disciples don’t conceal my behavior,

586. 586

     नna चाहंcā·haṃ सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi सीलतोsī·la·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसामि।pac·cā·sī·sā·mi

     na cāhaṁ sāvakehi sīlato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsāmi.

     and I don’t expect them to do so.

587. 587

     अहंa·haṃ खोkho पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिसुद्धाजीवोpa·ri·sud·dhā·jī·vo समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     Ahaṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, parisuddhājīvo samāno …pe…

     I claim my livelihood is pure …

588. 588

     परिसुद्धधम्मदेसनोpa·ri·sud·dha·dham·ma·de·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     parisuddhadhammadesano samāno …pe…

     I claim my teachings are pure …

589. 589

     परिसुद्धवेय्याकरणोpa·ri·sud·dha·vey·yā·ka·ra·ṇo समानोsa·mā·no …पे…pe

     parisuddhaveyyākaraṇo samāno …pe…

     I claim my explanations are pure …

590. 590

     परिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोpa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·no समानोsa·mā·no “परिसुद्धञाणदस्सनोम्ही”तिpa·ri·sud·dha·ñā·ṇa·das·sa·nom·hī पटिजानामिpa·ṭi·jā·nā·mi “परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मेme ञाणदस्सनंñā·ṇa·das·sa·naṃ परियोदातंpa·ri·yo·dā·taṃ असङ्किलिट्ठन्”तिa·saṅ·ki·liṭ·ṭhan च,ca नna चca मंmaṃ सावकाsā·va·kā ञाणदस्सनतोñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·to रक्खन्ति,rak·khan·ti नna चाहंcā·haṃ सावकेहिsā·va·ke·hi ञाणदस्सनतोñā·ṇa·das·sa·na·to रक्खंrak·khaṃ पच्चासीसामि।pac·cā·sī·sā·mi

     parisuddhañāṇadassano samāno “parisuddhañāṇadassanomhī”ti paṭijānāmi “parisuddhaṁ me ñāṇadassanaṁ pariyodātaṁ asaṅkiliṭṭhan”ti ca, na ca maṁ sāvakā ñāṇadassanato rakkhanti, na cāhaṁ sāvakehi ñāṇadassanato rakkhaṁ paccāsīsāmi.

     I claim my knowledge and vision are pure because they are. My disciples don’t conceal my knowledge and vision, and I don’t expect them to do so.

591. 591

     “अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ परूपक्कमेनpa·rū·pak·ka·me·na तथागतंta·thā·ga·taṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेय्य।vo·ro·pey·ya

     “Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṁ parūpakkamena tathāgataṁ jīvitā voropeyya.

     It’s impossible for anyone to kill me through an act of violence.

592. 592

     अनुपक्कमेन,a·nu·pak·ka·me·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तथागताta·thā·ga·tā परिनिब्बायन्ति।pa·ri·nib·bā·yan·ti

     Anupakkamena, bhikkhave, tathāgatā parinibbāyanti.

     The Buddha won’t attain final extinguishment through an act of violence.

593. 593

     गच्छथgac·cha·tha तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यथाविहारं।ya·thā·vi·hā·raṃ

     Gacchatha tumhe, bhikkhave, yathāvihāraṁ.

     Go to your dwellings, monks.

594. 594

     अरक्खिया,a·rak·khi·yā भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तथागता”ति।ta·thā·ga·tā

     Arakkhiyā, bhikkhave, tathāgatā”ti.

     I don’t need any protection.”

595. 595

     2।5। नाळागिरिपेसनnā·ḷā·gi·ri·pe·sa·na

     2.5. Nāḷāgiripesana

     8. The letting loose of Nāḷāgiri

596. 596

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he नाळागिरिnā·ḷā·gi·ri नामnā·ma हत्थीhat·thī चण्डोcaṇ·ḍo होति,ho·ti मनुस्सघातको।ma·nus·sa·ghā·ta·ko

     Tena kho pana samayena rājagahe nāḷāgiri nāma hatthī caṇḍo hoti, manussaghātako.

     At that time in Rājagaha there was a fierce and man-killing elephant called Nāḷāgiri.

597. 597

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā हत्थिसालंhat·thi·sā·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā हत्थिभण्डेhat·thi·bhaṇ·ḍe एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho devadatto rājagahaṁ pavisitvā hatthisālaṁ gantvā hatthibhaṇḍe etadavoca—

     Just then Devadatta entered Rājagaha, went to the elephant stables, and said to the elephant keepers,

598. 598

     “मयंma·yaṃ खो,kho भणे,bha·ṇe राजञातकाrā·ja·ñā·ta·kā नामnā·ma पटिबलाpa·ṭi·ba·lā नीचट्ठानियंnī·caṭ·ṭhā·ni·yaṃ उच्चट्ठानेuc·caṭ·ṭhā·ne ठपेतुं,ṭha·pe·tuṃ भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi वेतनम्पिve·ta·nam·pi वड्ढापेतुं।vaḍ·ḍhā·pe·tuṃ

     “mayaṁ kho, bhaṇe, rājañātakā nāma paṭibalā nīcaṭṭhāniyaṁ uccaṭṭhāne ṭhapetuṁ, bhattampi vetanampi vaḍḍhāpetuṁ.

     “We who are relatives of the king are capable of having people promoted and getting them a raise.

599. 599

     तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe यदाya·dā समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo इमंi·maṃ रच्छंrac·chaṃ पटिपन्नोpa·ṭi·pan·no होति,ho·ti तदाta·dā इमंi·maṃ नाळागिरिंnā·ḷā·gi·riṃ हत्थिंhat·thiṃ मुञ्चेत्वाmuñ·cet·vā इमंi·maṃ रच्छंrac·chaṃ पटिपादेथा”ति।pa·ṭi·pā·de·thā

     Tena hi, bhaṇe, yadā samaṇo gotamo imaṁ racchaṁ paṭipanno hoti, tadā imaṁ nāḷāgiriṁ hatthiṁ muñcetvā imaṁ racchaṁ paṭipādethā”ti.

     So then, when the ascetic Gotama comes walking along this street, release the elephant Nāḷāgiri down it.”

600. 600

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho तेte हत्थिभण्डाhat·thi·bhaṇ·ḍā देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa पच्चस्सोसुं।pac·cas·so·suṃ

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te hatthibhaṇḍā devadattassa paccassosuṁ.

     “Yes, sir.”

601. 601

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya सम्बहुलेहिsam·ba·hu·le·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

     Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

     Then, one morning, the Buddha robed up, took his bowl and robe, and entered Rājagaha for alms together with a number of monks.

602. 602

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तंtaṃ रच्छंrac·chaṃ पटिपज्जि।pa·ṭi·paj·ji

     Atha kho bhagavā taṁ racchaṁ paṭipajji.

     And the Buddha walked down that very street.

603. 603

     अद्दसासुंad·da·sā·suṃ खोkho तेte हत्थिभण्डाhat·thi·bhaṇ·ḍā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ तंtaṃ रच्छंrac·chaṃ पटिपन्नं।pa·ṭi·pan·naṃ

     Addasāsuṁ kho te hatthibhaṇḍā bhagavantaṁ taṁ racchaṁ paṭipannaṁ.

     When the elephant keepers saw the Buddha coming,

604. 604

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na नाळागिरिंnā·ḷā·gi·riṃ हत्थिंhat·thiṃ मुञ्चित्वाmuñ·cit·vā तंtaṃ रच्छंrac·chaṃ पटिपादेसुं।pa·ṭi·pā·de·suṃ

     Disvāna nāḷāgiriṁ hatthiṁ muñcitvā taṁ racchaṁ paṭipādesuṁ.

     they released Nāḷāgiri down the same street.

605. 605

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho नाळागिरिnā·ḷā·gi·ri हत्थीhat·thī भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं।ā·gac·chan·taṃ

     Addasā kho nāḷāgiri hatthī bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ.

     Nāḷāgiri saw the Buddha coming.

606. 606

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na सोण्डंsoṇ·ḍaṃ उस्सापेत्वाus·sā·pet·vā पहट्ठकण्णवालोpa·haṭ·ṭha·kaṇ·ṇa·vā·lo येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनte·na अभिधावि।a·bhi·dhā·vi

     Disvāna soṇḍaṁ ussāpetvā pahaṭṭhakaṇṇavālo yena bhagavā tena abhidhāvi.

     He blew his trunk, and with ears and tail bristling, he charged toward the Buddha.

607. 607

     अद्दसासुंad·da·sā·suṃ खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū नाळागिरिंnā·ḷā·gi·riṃ हत्थिंhat·thiṃ दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्तं।ā·gac·chan·taṃ

     Addasāsuṁ kho te bhikkhū nāḷāgiriṁ hatthiṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ.

     When the monks saw Nāḷāgiri coming,

608. 608

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Disvāna bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     they said to the Buddha,

609. 609

     “अयं,a·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te नाळागिरिnā·ḷā·gi·ri हत्थीhat·thī चण्डोcaṇ·ḍo मनुस्सघातकोma·nus·sa·ghā·ta·ko इमंi·maṃ रच्छंrac·chaṃ पटिपन्नो।pa·ṭi·pan·no

     “ayaṁ, bhante, nāḷāgiri hatthī caṇḍo manussaghātako imaṁ racchaṁ paṭipanno.

     “This elephant coming down the street is the fierce, man-killer Nāḷāgiri.

610. 610

     पटिक्कमतु,pa·ṭik·ka·ma·tu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवा;bha·ga·vā

     Paṭikkamatu, bhante, bhagavā;

     Please retreat, venerable sir.”

611. 611

     पटिक्कमतुpa·ṭik·ka·ma·tu सुगतो”ति।su·ga·to

     paṭikkamatu sugato”ti.

     (Pāli only)

612. 612

     “आगच्छथ,ā·gac·cha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve माmā भायित्थ।bhā·yit·tha

     “Āgacchatha, bhikkhave, mā bhāyittha.

     “Come, don’t be afraid.

613. 613

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ परूपक्कमेनpa·rū·pak·ka·me·na तथागतंta·thā·ga·taṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेय्य।vo·ro·pey·ya

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṁ parūpakkamena tathāgataṁ jīvitā voropeyya.

     It’s impossible for anyone to kill the Buddha through an act of violence.

614. 614

     अनुपक्कमेन,a·nu·pak·ka·me·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तथागताta·thā·ga·tā परिनिब्बायन्ती”ति।pa·ri·nib·bā·yan·tī

     Anupakkamena, bhikkhave, tathāgatā parinibbāyantī”ti.

     The Buddha won’t attain final extinguishment through an act of violence.”

615. 615

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū …पे…pe

     Dutiyampi kho te bhikkhū …pe…

     A second time

616. 616

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     tatiyampi kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ—

     and a third time those monks said the same thing to the Buddha,

617. 617

     “अयं,a·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te नाळागिरिnā·ḷā·gi·ri हत्थीhat·thī चण्डोcaṇ·ḍo मनुस्सघातकोma·nus·sa·ghā·ta·ko इमंi·maṃ रच्छंrac·chaṃ पटिपन्नो।pa·ṭi·pan·no

     “ayaṁ, bhante, nāḷāgiri hatthī caṇḍo manussaghātako imaṁ racchaṁ paṭipanno.

     (Pāli only)

618. 618

     पटिक्कमतु,pa·ṭik·ka·ma·tu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवा;bha·ga·vā

     Paṭikkamatu, bhante, bhagavā;

     (Pāli only)

619. 619

     पटिक्कमतुpa·ṭik·ka·ma·tu सुगतो”ति।su·ga·to

     paṭikkamatu sugato”ti.

     (Pāli only)

620. 620

     “आगच्छथ,ā·gac·cha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve माmā भायित्थ।bhā·yit·tha

     “Āgacchatha, bhikkhave, mā bhāyittha.

     each time getting the same reply.

621. 621

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ परूपक्कमेनpa·rū·pak·ka·me·na तथागतंta·thā·ga·taṃ जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेय्य।vo·ro·pey·ya

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṁ parūpakkamena tathāgataṁ jīvitā voropeyya.

     (Pāli only)

622. 622

     अनुपक्कमेन,a·nu·pak·ka·me·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तथागताta·thā·ga·tā परिनिब्बायन्ती”ति।pa·ri·nib·bā·yan·tī

     Anupakkamena, bhikkhave, tathāgatā parinibbāyantī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

623. 623

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na मनुस्साma·nus·sā पासादेसुपिpā·sā·de·su·pi हम्मियेसुपिham·mi·ye·su·pi छदनेसुपिcha·da·ne·su·pi आरुळ्हाā·ru·ḷhā अच्छन्ति।ac·chan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena manussā pāsādesupi hammiyesupi chadanesupi āruḷhā acchanti.

     On that occasion people had ascended their stilt houses and even their roofs.

624. 624

     तत्थtat·tha येye तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā अस्सद्धाas·sad·dhā अप्पसन्नाap·pa·san·nā दुब्बुद्धिनो,dub·bud·dhi·no तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Tattha ye te manussā assaddhā appasannā dubbuddhino, te evamāhaṁsu—

     The foolish people with little faith and confidence said,

625. 625

     “अभिरूपोa·bhi·rū·po वत,va·ta भो,bho महासमणोma·hā·sa·ma·ṇo नागेनnā·ge·na विहेठीयिस्सती”ति।vi·he·ṭhī·yis·sa·tī

     “abhirūpo vata, bho, mahāsamaṇo nāgena viheṭhīyissatī”ti.

     “The elephant will hurt the handsome, great ascetic.”

626. 626

     येye पनpa·na तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā सद्धाsad·dhā पसन्नाpa·san·nā पण्डिताpaṇ·ḍi·tā ब्यत्ताbyat·tā बुद्धिमन्तो,bud·dhi·man·to तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ye pana te manussā saddhā pasannā paṇḍitā byattā buddhimanto, te evamāhaṁsu—

     But the wise people with faith and confidence said,

627. 627

     “नचिरस्संna·ci·ras·saṃ वत,va·ta भो,bho नागोnā·go नागेनnā·ge·na सङ्गामेस्सती”ति।saṅ·gā·mes·sa·tī

     “nacirassaṁ vata, bho, nāgo nāgena saṅgāmessatī”ti.

     “Soon the great man and the great elephant will meet in battle.”

628. 628

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā नाळागिरिंnā·ḷā·gi·riṃ हत्थिंhat·thiṃ मेत्तेनmet·te·na चित्तेनcit·te·na फरि।pha·ri

     Atha kho bhagavā nāḷāgiriṁ hatthiṁ mettena cittena phari.

     The Buddha then pervaded Nāḷāgiri with a mind of love.

629. 629

     अथa·tha खोkho नाळागिरिnā·ḷā·gi·ri हत्थीhat·thī भगवतोbha·ga·va·to मेत्तेनmet·te·na चित्तेनcit·te·na फुट्ठोphuṭ·ṭho सोण्डंsoṇ·ḍaṃ ओरोपेत्वाo·ro·pet·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पुरतोpu·ra·to अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho nāḷāgiri hatthī bhagavato mettena cittena phuṭṭho soṇḍaṁ oropetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato purato aṭṭhāsi.

     Feeling it, Nāḷāgiri lowered his trunk, went up to the Buddha, and stood in front of him.

630. 630

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā दक्खिणेनdak·khi·ṇe·na हत्थेनhat·the·na नाळागिरिस्सnā·ḷā·gi·ris·sa हत्थिस्सhat·this·sa कुम्भंkum·bhaṃ परामसन्तोpa·rā·ma·san·to नाळागिरिंnā·ḷā·gi·riṃ हत्थिंhat·thiṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi गाथाहिgā·thā·hi अज्झभासि—aj·jha·bhā·si

     Atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇena hatthena nāḷāgirissa hatthissa kumbhaṁ parāmasanto nāḷāgiriṁ hatthiṁ imāhi gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi—

     And while stroking Nāḷāgiri on the forehead with his right hand, the Buddha spoke these verses:

631. 631

     “माmā कुञ्जरkuñ·ja·ra नागमासदो,nā·ga·mā·sa·do

     “Mā kuñjara nāgamāsado,

     “Do not, elephant, attack a great man;

632. 632

     दुक्खञ्हिduk·khañ·hi कुञ्जरkuñ·ja·ra नागमासदो;nā·ga·mā·sa·do

     Dukkhañhi kuñjara nāgamāsado;

     Painful it is to attack a great man.

633. 633

     नna हिhi नागहतस्सnā·ga·ha·tas·sa कुञ्जर,kuñ·ja·ra

     Na hi nāgahatassa kuñjara,

     For a killer of a great man,

634. 634

     सुगतिsu·ga·ti होतिho·ti इतोi·to परंpa·raṃ यतो।ya·to

     Sugati hoti ito paraṁ yato.

     The next birth is not good.

635. 635

     माmā चca मदोma·do माmā चca पमादो,pa·mā·do

     Mā ca mado mā ca pamādo,

     Don’t be intoxicated or heedless,

636. 636

     नna हिhi पमत्ताpa·mat·tā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ वजन्तिva·jan·ti ते;te

     Na hi pamattā sugatiṁ vajanti te;

     For the heedless are not happily reborn.

637. 637

     त्वञ्ञेवtvañ·ñe·va तथाta·thā करिस्ससि,ka·ris·sa·si

     Tvaññeva tathā karissasi,

     Only do those things

638. 638

     येनye·na त्वंtvaṃ सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ गमिस्ससी”ति।ga·mis·sa·sī

     Yena tvaṁ sugatiṁ gamissasī”ti.

     That take you to a good destination.”

639. 639

     अथa·tha खोkho नाळागिरिnā·ḷā·gi·ri हत्थीhat·thī सोण्डायsoṇ·ḍā·ya भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पादपंसूनिpā·da·paṃ·sū·ni गहेत्वाga·het·vā उपरिमुद्धनिu·pa·ri·mud·dha·ni आकिरित्वाā·ki·rit·vā पटिकुटियोवpa·ṭi·ku·ṭi·yo·va ओसक्कि,o·sak·ki यावyā·va भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अद्दक्खि।ad·dak·khi

     Atha kho nāḷāgiri hatthī soṇḍāya bhagavato pādapaṁsūni gahetvā uparimuddhani ākiritvā paṭikuṭiyova osakki, yāva bhagavantaṁ addakkhi.

     Nāḷāgiri sucked the dust from the Buddha’s feet with his trunk and scattered it overhead. He then walked backward while looking at the Buddha,

640. 640

     अथa·tha खोkho नाळागिरिnā·ḷā·gi·ri हत्थीhat·thī हत्थिसालंhat·thi·sā·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā सकेsa·ke ठानेṭhā·ne अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho nāḷāgiri hatthī hatthisālaṁ gantvā sake ṭhāne aṭṭhāsi.

     and returned to his stall in the elephant stables.

641. 641

     तथाta·thā दन्तोdan·to चca पनpa·na नाळागिरिnā·ḷā·gi·ri हत्थीhat·thī अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Tathā danto ca pana nāḷāgiri hatthī ahosi.

     That is how tame Nāḷāgiri had become.

642. 642

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na मनुस्साma·nus·sā इमंi·maṃ गाथंgā·thaṃ गायन्ति—gā·yan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena manussā imaṁ gāthaṁ gāyanti—

     On that occasion people chanted this verse:

643. 643

     “दण्डेनेकेdaṇ·ḍe·ne·ke दमयन्ति,da·ma·yan·ti

     “Daṇḍeneke damayanti,

     “Some are tamed with sticks,

644. 644

     अङ्कुसेहिaṅ·ku·se·hi कसाहिka·sā·hi च;ca

     aṅkusehi kasāhi ca;

     And some with goads and whips.

645. 645

     अदण्डेनa·daṇ·ḍe·na असत्थेन,a·sat·the·na

     Adaṇḍena asatthena,

     Without stick or sword,

646. 646

     नागोnā·go दन्तोdan·to महेसिना”ति।ma·he·si·nā

     nāgo danto mahesinā”ti.

     The great sage tamed the elephant.”

647. 647

     मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     And people complained and criticized Devadatta,

648. 648

     “यावyā·va पापोpā·po अयंa·yaṃ देवदत्तो,de·va·dat·to अलक्खिको,a·lak·khi·ko यत्रyat·ra हिhi नामnā·ma समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa एवंमहिद्धिकस्सe·vaṃ·ma·hid·dhi·kas·sa एवंमहानुभावस्सe·vaṃ·ma·hā·nu·bhā·vas·sa वधायva·dhā·ya परक्कमिस्सती”ति।pa·rak·ka·mis·sa·tī

     “yāva pāpo ayaṁ devadatto, alakkhiko, yatra hi nāma samaṇassa gotamassa evaṁmahiddhikassa evaṁmahānubhāvassa vadhāya parakkamissatī”ti.

     “How evil and indiscriminate he is, this Devadatta, in trying to kill the ascetic Gotama so powerful and mighty!”

649. 649

     देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa लाभसक्कारोlā·bha·sak·kā·ro परिहायि।pa·ri·hā·yi

     Devadattassa lābhasakkāro parihāyi.

     Devadatta’s material support and honor declined,

650. 650

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to चca लाभसक्कारोlā·bha·sak·kā·ro अभिवड्ढि।a·bhi·vaḍ·ḍhi

     Bhagavato ca lābhasakkāro abhivaḍḍhi.

     whereas those of the Buddha increased.

651. 651

     2।6। पञ्चवत्थुयाचनकथाpañ·ca·vat·thu·yā·ca·na·ka·thā

     2.6. Pañcavatthuyācanakathā

     9. The account of the request for the five points

652. 652

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to परिहीनलाभसक्कारोpa·ri·hī·na·lā·bha·sak·kā·ro सपरिसोsa·pa·ri·so कुलेसुku·le·su विञ्ञापेत्वाviñ·ñā·pet·vā विञ्ञापेत्वाviñ·ñā·pet·vā भुञ्जति।bhuñ·ja·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena devadatto parihīnalābhasakkāro sapariso kulesu viññāpetvā viññāpetvā bhuñjati.

     Because of his loss of material support and honor, Devadatta and his followers had to ask families repeatedly to get invited to meals.

653. 653

     मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     People complained and criticized them,

654. 654

     “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā कुलेसुku·le·su विञ्ञापेत्वाviñ·ñā·pet·vā विञ्ञापेत्वाviñ·ñā·pet·vā भुञ्जिस्सन्ति।bhuñ·jis·san·ti

     “kathañhi nāma samaṇā sakyaputtiyā kulesu viññāpetvā viññāpetvā bhuñjissanti.

     “How can the Sakyan monastics repeatedly ask families to get invited to meals?

655. 655

     कस्सkas·sa सम्पन्नंsam·pan·naṃ नna मनापं,ma·nā·paṃ कस्सkas·sa सादुंsā·duṃ नna रुच्चती”ति।ruc·ca·tī

     Kassa sampannaṁ na manāpaṁ, kassa sāduṁ na ruccatī”ti.

     Who doesn’t like nice food? Who doesn’t prefer tasty food?”

656. 656

     अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho भिक्खूbhik·khū तेसंte·saṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ उज्झायन्तानंuj·jhā·yan·tā·naṃ खिय्यन्तानंkhiy·yan·tā·naṃ विपाचेन्तानं।vi·pā·cen·tā·naṃ

     Assosuṁ kho bhikkhū tesaṁ manussānaṁ ujjhāyantānaṁ khiyyantānaṁ vipācentānaṁ.

     The monks heard the complaints of those people,

657. 657

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     and the monks of few desires complained and criticized those monks,

658. 658

     “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सपरिसोsa·pa·ri·so कुलेसुku·le·su विञ्ञापेत्वाviñ·ñā·pet·vā विञ्ञापेत्वाviñ·ñā·pet·vā भुञ्जिस्सती”ति।bhuñ·jis·sa·tī

     “kathañhi nāma devadatto sapariso kulesu viññāpetvā viññāpetvā bhuñjissatī”ti.

     “How can Devadatta and his followers repeatedly ask families to get invited to meals?”

659. 659

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

     They told the Buddha. Soon afterwards he had the Sangha gathered and questioned Devadatta:

660. 660

     “सच्चंsac·caṃ किरki·ra त्वं,tvaṃ देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta सपरिसोsa·pa·ri·so कुलेसुku·le·su विञ्ञापेत्वाviñ·ñā·pet·vā विञ्ञापेत्वाviñ·ñā·pet·vā भुञ्जसी”ति?bhuñ·ja·sī

     “saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, devadatta, sapariso kulesu viññāpetvā viññāpetvā bhuñjasī”ti?

     “Is it true, Devadatta, that you do this?”

661. 661

     “सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”तिbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

     “Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti …pe…

     “It’s true, sir.” …

662. 662

     विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

     vigarahitvā …pe…

     After rebuking him …

663. 663

     धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

664. 664

     “तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कुलेसुku·le·su तिकभोजनंti·ka·bho·ja·naṃ पञ्ञपेस्सामिpañ·ña·pes·sā·mi तयोta·yo अत्थवसेat·tha·va·se पटिच्च—pa·ṭic·ca

     “tena hi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ kulesu tikabhojanaṁ paññapessāmi tayo atthavase paṭicca—

     “Well then, for monks eating among families, I’ll lay down a rule against eating in groups of more than three, for these three reasons:

665. 665

     दुम्मङ्कूनंdum·maṅ·kū·naṃ पुग्गलानंpug·ga·lā·naṃ निग्गहाय;nig·ga·hā·ya

     dummaṅkūnaṁ puggalānaṁ niggahāya;

     for the restraint of bad people;

666. 666

     पेसलानंpe·sa·lā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ फासुविहाराय,phā·su·vi·hā·rā·ya ‘माmā पापिच्छाpā·pic·chā पक्खंpak·khaṃ निस्सायnis·sā·ya सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्देय्युन्’ति;bhin·dey·yun

     pesalānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ phāsuvihārāya, ‘mā pāpicchā pakkhaṁ nissāya saṅghaṁ bhindeyyun’ti;

     for the ease of good monks, stopping those with bad desires from creating a faction and then a schism in the Sangha;

667. 667

     कुलानुद्दयायku·lā·nud·da·yā·ya च।ca

     kulānuddayāya ca.

     and out of compassion for families.

668. 668

     गणभोजनेga·ṇa·bho·ja·ne यथाधम्मोya·thā·dham·mo कारेतब्बो”ति।kā·re·tab·bo

     Gaṇabhojane yathādhammo kāretabbo”ti.

     Anyone eating in a group is to be dealt with according to the rule.”

669. 669

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to येनye·na कोकालिकोko·kā·li·ko कटमोदकतिस्सकोka·ṭa·mo·da·ka·tis·sa·ko खण्डदेवियाkhaṇ·ḍa·de·vi·yā पुत्तोput·to समुद्ददत्तोsa·mud·da·dat·to तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā कोकालिकंko·kā·li·kaṃ कटमोदकतिस्सकंka·ṭa·mo·da·ka·tis·sa·kaṃ खण्डदेवियाkhaṇ·ḍa·de·vi·yā पुत्तंput·taṃ समुद्ददत्तंsa·mud·da·dat·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho devadatto yena kokāliko kaṭamodakatissako khaṇḍadeviyā putto samuddadatto tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā kokālikaṁ kaṭamodakatissakaṁ khaṇḍadeviyā puttaṁ samuddadattaṁ etadavoca—

     Soon afterwards Devadatta went to Kokālika, Kaṭamodakatissaka, Khaṇḍadeviyāputta, and Samuddadatta. He said to them,

670. 670

     “एथ,e·tha मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa सङ्घभेदंsaṅ·gha·bhe·daṃ करिस्सामka·ris·sā·ma चक्कभेदन्”ति।cak·ka·bhe·dan

     “etha, mayaṁ, āvuso, samaṇassa gotamassa saṅghabhedaṁ karissāma cakkabhedan”ti.

     “Let’s cause a schism in the Sangha of the ascetic Gotama. Let’s break its authority.”

671. 671

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te कोकालिकोko·kā·li·ko देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Evaṁ vutte, kokāliko devadattaṁ etadavoca—

     Kokālika said to Devadatta,

672. 672

     “समणोsa·ma·ṇo खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so गोतमोgo·ta·mo महिद्धिकोma·hid·dhi·ko महानुभावो।ma·hā·nu·bhā·vo

     “samaṇo kho, āvuso, gotamo mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo.

     “The ascetic Gotama is powerful and mighty.

673. 673

     कथंka·thaṃ मयंma·yaṃ समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa सङ्घभेदंsaṅ·gha·bhe·daṃ करिस्सामka·ris·sā·ma चक्कभेदन्”ति?cak·ka·bhe·dan

     Kathaṁ mayaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa saṅghabhedaṁ karissāma cakkabhedan”ti?

     How can we achieve this?”

674. 674

     “एथ,e·tha मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni याचिस्साम—yā·cis·sā·ma

     “Etha, mayaṁ, āvuso, samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pañca vatthūni yācissāma—

     “Well, let’s go to the ascetic Gotama and request five things:

675. 675

     ‘भगवा,bha·ga·vā भन्ते,bhan·te अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छस्सap·pic·chas·sa सन्तुट्ठस्सsan·tuṭ·ṭhas·sa सल्लेखस्सsal·le·khas·sa धुतस्सdhu·tas·sa पासादिकस्सpā·sā·di·kas·sa अपचयस्सa·pa·ca·yas·sa वीरियारम्भस्सvī·ri·yā·ram·bhas·sa वण्णवादी।vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī

     ‘bhagavā, bhante, anekapariyāyena appicchassa santuṭṭhassa sallekhassa dhutassa pāsādikassa apacayassa vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī.

     ‘In many ways, sir, you praise fewness of wishes, contentment, self-effacement, ascetic practices, being inspiring, the reduction in things, and being energetic.

676. 676

     इमानि,i·mā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छतायap·pic·cha·tā·ya सन्तुट्ठियाsan·tuṭ·ṭhi·yā सल्लेखायsal·le·khā·ya धुततायdhu·ta·tā·ya पासादिकतायpā·sā·di·ka·tā·ya अपचयायa·pa·ca·yā·ya वीरियारम्भायvī·ri·yā·ram·bhā·ya संवत्तन्ति।saṃ·vat·tan·ti

     Imāni, bhante, pañca vatthūni anekapariyāyena appicchatāya santuṭṭhiyā sallekhāya dhutatāya pāsādikatāya apacayāya vīriyārambhāya saṁvattanti.

     And there are five things that lead to just that. It would be good, sir:

677. 677

     साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ आरञ्ञिकाā·rañ·ñi·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo गामन्तंgā·man·taṃ ओसरेय्य,o·sa·rey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्य।phu·sey·ya

     Sādhu, bhante, bhikkhū yāvajīvaṁ āraññikā assu; yo gāmantaṁ osareyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya.

     If the monks stayed in the wilderness for life, and whoever stayed near an inhabited area would commit an offense,

678. 678

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ पिण्डपातिकाpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ti·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo निमन्तनंni·man·ta·naṃ सादियेय्य,sā·di·yey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्य।phu·sey·ya

     Yāvajīvaṁ piṇḍapātikā assu; yo nimantanaṁ sādiyeyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya.

     if they ate only almsfood for life, and whoever accepted an invitational meal would commit an offense,

679. 679

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ पंसुकूलिकाpaṃ·su·kū·li·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ सादियेय्य,sā·di·yey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्य।phu·sey·ya

     Yāvajīvaṁ paṁsukūlikā assu; yo gahapaticīvaraṁ sādiyeyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya.

     If they wore rag robes for life, and whoever accepted robe-cloth from a householder would commit an offense,

680. 680

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ रुक्खमूलिकाruk·kha·mū·li·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo छन्नंchan·naṃ उपगच्छेय्य,u·pa·gac·chey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्य।phu·sey·ya

     Yāvajīvaṁ rukkhamūlikā assu; yo channaṁ upagaccheyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya.

     If they lived at the foot of a tree for life, and whoever took shelter would commit an offense,

681. 681

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ मच्छमंसंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ नna खादेय्युं;khā·dey·yuṃ योyo मच्छमंसंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ खादेय्य,khā·dey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्या’ति।phu·sey·yā

     Yāvajīvaṁ macchamaṁsaṁ na khādeyyuṁ; yo macchamaṁsaṁ khādeyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyyā’ti.

     If they didn’t eat fish or meat for life, and whoever did would commit an offense.’

682. 682

     इमानिi·mā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo नानुजानिस्सति।nā·nu·jā·nis·sa·ti

     Imāni pañca vatthūni samaṇo gotamo nānujānissati.

     The ascetic Gotama won’t allow this.

683. 683

     तेte मयंma·yaṃ इमेहिi·me·hi पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi जनंja·naṃ सञ्ञापेस्सामा”ति।sañ·ñā·pes·sā·mā

     Te mayaṁ imehi pañcahi vatthūhi janaṁ saññāpessāmā”ti.

     We’ll then be able to win people over with these five points.”

684. 684

     “सक्काsak·kā खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so इमेहिi·me·hi पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do कातुंkā·tuṃ चक्कभेदो।cak·ka·bhe·do

     “Sakkā kho, āvuso, imehi pañcahi vatthūhi samaṇassa gotamassa saṅghabhedo kātuṁ cakkabhedo.

     Kokālika said, “It might be possible to cause a schism in the Sangha with these five points,

685. 685

     लूखप्पसन्नाlū·khap·pa·san·nā हि,hi आवुसो,ā·vu·so मनुस्सा”ति।ma·nus·sā

     Lūkhappasannā hi, āvuso, manussā”ti.

     for people have confidence in austerity.”

686. 686

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सपरिसोsa·pa·ri·so येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho devadatto sapariso yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Devadatta and his followers then went to the Buddha, bowed and sat down,

687. 687

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho devadatto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and Devadatta made his request.

688. 688

     “भगवा,bha·ga·vā भन्ते,bhan·te अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छस्सap·pic·chas·sa सन्तुट्ठस्सsan·tuṭ·ṭhas·sa सल्लेखस्सsal·le·khas·sa धुतस्सdhu·tas·sa पासादिकस्सpā·sā·di·kas·sa अपचयस्सa·pa·ca·yas·sa वीरियारम्भस्सvī·ri·yā·ram·bhas·sa वण्णवादी।vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī

     “bhagavā, bhante, anekapariyāyena appicchassa santuṭṭhassa sallekhassa dhutassa pāsādikassa apacayassa vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī.

     (Pāli only)

689. 689

     इमानि,i·mā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छतायap·pic·cha·tā·ya सन्तुट्ठियाsan·tuṭ·ṭhi·yā सल्लेखायsal·le·khā·ya धुततायdhu·ta·tā·ya पासादिकतायpā·sā·di·ka·tā·ya अपचयायa·pa·ca·yā·ya वीरियारम्भायvī·ri·yā·ram·bhā·ya संवत्तन्ति।saṃ·vat·tan·ti

     Imāni, bhante, pañca vatthūni anekapariyāyena appicchatāya santuṭṭhiyā sallekhāya dhutatāya pāsādikatāya apacayāya vīriyārambhāya saṁvattanti.

     (Pāli only)

690. 690

     साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ आरञ्ञिकाā·rañ·ñi·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo गामन्तंgā·man·taṃ ओसरेय्य,o·sa·rey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्य।phu·sey·ya

     Sādhu, bhante, bhikkhū yāvajīvaṁ āraññikā assu; yo gāmantaṁ osareyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya.

     (Pāli only)

691. 691

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ पिण्डपातिकाpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ti·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo निमन्तनंni·man·ta·naṃ सादियेय्य,sā·di·yey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्य।phu·sey·ya

     Yāvajīvaṁ piṇḍapātikā assu; yo nimantanaṁ sādiyeyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya.

     (Pāli only)

692. 692

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ पंसुकूलिकाpaṃ·su·kū·li·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ सादियेय्य,sā·di·yey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्य।phu·sey·ya

     Yāvajīvaṁ paṁsukūlikā assu; yo gahapaticīvaraṁ sādiyeyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya.

     (Pāli only)

693. 693

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ रुक्खमूलिकाruk·kha·mū·li·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo छन्नंchan·naṃ उपगच्छेय्य,u·pa·gac·chey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्य।phu·sey·ya

     Yāvajīvaṁ rukkhamūlikā assu; yo channaṁ upagaccheyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya.

     (Pāli only)

694. 694

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ मच्छमंसंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ नna खादेय्युं;khā·dey·yuṃ योyo मच्छमंसंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ खादेय्य,khā·dey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्या”ति।phu·sey·yā

     Yāvajīvaṁ macchamaṁsaṁ na khādeyyuṁ; yo macchamaṁsaṁ khādeyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

695. 695

     “अलं,a·laṃ देवदत्त।de·va·dat·ta

     “Alaṁ, devadatta.

     The Buddha replied, “No, Devadatta.

696. 696

     योyo इच्छति,ic·cha·ti आरञ्ञिकोā·rañ·ñi·ko होतु;ho·tu योyo इच्छति,ic·cha·ti गामन्तेgā·man·te विहरतु।vi·ha·ra·tu

     Yo icchati, āraññiko hotu; yo icchati, gāmante viharatu.

     Those who wish may stay in the wilderness, and those who wish may live near inhabited areas.

697. 697

     योyo इच्छति,ic·cha·ti पिण्डपातिकोpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ti·ko होतु;ho·tu योyo इच्छति,ic·cha·ti निमन्तनंni·man·ta·naṃ सादियतु।sā·di·ya·tu

     Yo icchati, piṇḍapātiko hotu; yo icchati, nimantanaṁ sādiyatu.

     Those who wish may eat only almsfood, and those who wish may accept invitational meals.

698. 698

     योyo इच्छति,ic·cha·ti पंसुकूलिकोpaṃ·su·kū·li·ko होतु;ho·tu योyo इच्छति,ic·cha·ti गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ सादियतु।sā·di·ya·tu

     Yo icchati, paṁsukūliko hotu; yo icchati, gahapaticīvaraṁ sādiyatu.

     Those who wish may wear rag robes, and those who wish may accept robe-cloth from householders.

699. 699

     अट्ठमासेaṭ·ṭha·mā·se खोkho मया,ma·yā देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta रुक्खमूलसेनासनंruk·kha·mū·la·se·nā·sa·naṃ अनुञ्ञातं;a·nuñ·ñā·taṃ

     Aṭṭhamāse kho mayā, devadatta, rukkhamūlasenāsanaṁ anuññātaṁ;

     I have allowed the foot of a tree as a resting place for eight months of the year,

700. 700

     तिकोटिपरिसुद्धंti·ko·ṭi·pa·ri·sud·dhaṃ मच्छमंसं—mac·cha·maṃ·saṃ

     tikoṭiparisuddhaṁ macchamaṁsaṁ—

     as well as fish and meat that are pure in three respects:

701. 701

     अदिट्ठं,a·diṭ·ṭhaṃ अस्सुतं,as·su·taṃ अपरिसङ्कितन्”ति।a·pa·ri·saṅ·ki·tan

     adiṭṭhaṁ, assutaṁ, aparisaṅkitan”ti.

     one hasn’t seen, heard, or suspected that the animal was specifically killed to feed a monastic.”

702. 702

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तो—de·va·dat·to

     Atha kho devadatto—

     Devadatta thought,

703. 703

     “नna भगवाbha·ga·vā इमानिi·mā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni अनुजानाती”ति—a·nu·jā·nā·tī

     “na bhagavā imāni pañca vatthūni anujānātī”ti—

     “The Buddha doesn’t allow the five points.”

704. 704

     हट्ठोhaṭ·ṭho उदग्गोu·dag·go सपरिसोsa·pa·ri·so उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     haṭṭho udaggo sapariso uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     Glad and elated, he got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left with his followers.

705. 705

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सपरिसोsa·pa·ri·so राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi जनंja·naṃ सञ्ञापेसि—sañ·ñā·pe·si

     Atha kho devadatto sapariso rājagahaṁ pavisitvā pañcahi vatthūhi janaṁ saññāpesi—

     Devadatta then entered Rājagaha and won people over with the five points,

706. 706

     “मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni याचिम्हा—yā·cim·hā

     “mayaṁ, āvuso, samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pañca vatthūni yācimhā—

     (Pāli only)

707. 707

     ‘भगवा,bha·ga·vā भन्ते,bhan·te अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छस्सap·pic·chas·sa …पे…pe

     ‘bhagavā, bhante, anekapariyāyena appicchassa …pe…

     (Pāli only)

708. 708

     वीरियारम्भस्सvī·ri·yā·ram·bhas·sa वण्णवादी।vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī

     vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī.

     (Pāli only)

709. 709

     इमानि,i·mā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छतायap·pic·cha·tā·ya …पे…pe

     Imāni, bhante, pañca vatthūni anekapariyāyena appicchatāya …pe…

     (Pāli only)

710. 710

     वीरियारम्भायvī·ri·yā·ram·bhā·ya संवत्तन्ति।saṃ·vat·tan·ti

     vīriyārambhāya saṁvattanti.

     (Pāli only)

711. 711

     साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ आरञ्ञिकाā·rañ·ñi·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo गामन्तंgā·man·taṃ ओसरेय्य,o·sa·rey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्यphu·sey·ya …पे…pe

     Sādhu, bhante, bhikkhū yāvajīvaṁ āraññikā assu; yo gāmantaṁ osareyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya …pe…

     (Pāli only)

712. 712

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ मच्छमंसंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ नna खादेय्युं;khā·dey·yuṃ योyo मच्छमंसंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ खादेय्य,khā·dey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्या’ति।phu·sey·yā

     yāvajīvaṁ macchamaṁsaṁ na khādeyyuṁ; yo macchamaṁsaṁ khādeyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyyā’ti.

     (Pāli only)

713. 713

     इमानिi·mā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo नानुजानाति।nā·nu·jā·nā·ti

     Imāni pañca vatthūni samaṇo gotamo nānujānāti.

     saying, “The ascetic Gotama doesn’t agree to them,

714. 714

     तेte मयंma·yaṃ इमेहिi·me·hi पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi समादायsa·mā·dā·ya वत्तामा”ति।vat·tā·mā

     Te mayaṁ imehi pañcahi vatthūhi samādāya vattāmā”ti.

     but we practice in accordance with them.”

715. 715

     तत्थtat·tha येye तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā अस्सद्धाas·sad·dhā अप्पसन्नाap·pa·san·nā दुब्बुद्धिनो,dub·bud·dhi·no तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Tattha ye te manussā assaddhā appasannā dubbuddhino, te evamāhaṁsu—

     The foolish people with little faith and confidence said,

716. 716

     “इमेi·me खोkho समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā धुताdhu·tā सल्लेखवुत्तिनो।sal·le·kha·vut·ti·no

     “ime kho samaṇā sakyaputtiyā dhutā sallekhavuttino.

     “These Sakyan monastics are practicing asceticism and living with the aim of self-effacement.

717. 717

     समणोsa·ma·ṇo पनpa·na गोतमोgo·ta·mo बाहुल्लिकोbā·hul·li·ko बाहुल्लायbā·hul·lā·ya चेतेती”ति।ce·te·tī

     Samaṇo pana gotamo bāhulliko bāhullāya cetetī”ti.

     But the ascetic Gotama is extravagant and has chosen a life of indulgence.”

718. 718

     येye पनpa·na तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā सद्धाsad·dhā पसन्नाpa·san·nā पण्डिताpaṇ·ḍi·tā ब्यत्ताbyat·tā बुद्धिमन्तो,bud·dhi·man·to तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Ye pana te manussā saddhā pasannā paṇḍitā byattā buddhimanto, te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     But the wise people who had faith and confidence complained and criticized Devadatta,

719. 719

     “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सङ्घभेदायsaṅ·gha·bhe·dā·ya परक्कमिस्सतिpa·rak·ka·mis·sa·ti चक्कभेदाया”ति।cak·ka·bhe·dā·yā

     “kathañhi nāma devadatto bhagavato saṅghabhedāya parakkamissati cakkabhedāyā”ti.

     “How can Devadatta pursue schism in the Sangha of the Buddha? How can he break its authority?”

720. 720

     अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho भिक्खूbhik·khū तेसंte·saṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ उज्झायन्तानंuj·jhā·yan·tā·naṃ खिय्यन्तानंkhiy·yan·tā·naṃ विपाचेन्तानं।vi·pā·cen·tā·naṃ

     Assosuṁ kho bhikkhū tesaṁ manussānaṁ ujjhāyantānaṁ khiyyantānaṁ vipācentānaṁ.

     The monks heard the criticism of those people,

721. 721

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     and the monks of few desires complained and criticized him in the same way.

722. 722

     “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सङ्घभेदायsaṅ·gha·bhe·dā·ya परक्कमिस्सतिpa·rak·ka·mis·sa·ti चक्कभेदाया”ति।cak·ka·bhe·dā·yā

     “kathañhi nāma devadatto saṅghabhedāya parakkamissati cakkabhedāyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

723. 723

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

     Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

     They then told the Buddha. Soon afterwards he had the Sangha gathered and questioned Devadatta:

724. 724

     “सच्चंsac·caṃ किरki·ra त्वं,tvaṃ देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta सङ्घभेदायsaṅ·gha·bhe·dā·ya परक्कमसिpa·rak·ka·ma·si चक्कभेदाया”ति?cak·ka·bhe·dā·yā

     “saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, devadatta, saṅghabhedāya parakkamasi cakkabhedāyā”ti?

     “Is it true, Devadatta, that you are doing this?”

725. 725

     “सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

     “Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti.

     “It’s true, sir.”

726. 726

     “अलं,a·laṃ देवदत्त।de·va·dat·ta

     “Alaṁ, devadatta.

     “Let it be, Devadatta,

727. 727

     माmā तेte रुच्चिruc·ci सङ्घभेदो।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Mā te rucci saṅghabhedo.

     don’t cause a schism in the Sangha.

728. 728

     गरुकोga·ru·ko खो,kho देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta सङ्घभेदो।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Garuko kho, devadatta, saṅghabhedo.

     Schism in the Sangha is a serious matter.

729. 729

     योyo खो,kho देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta समग्गंsa·mag·gaṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दति,bhin·da·ti कप्पट्ठिकंkap·paṭ·ṭhi·kaṃ किब्बिसंkib·bi·saṃ पसवति,pa·sa·va·ti कप्पंkap·paṃ निरयम्हिni·ra·yam·hi पच्चति।pac·ca·ti

     Yo kho, devadatta, samaggaṁ saṅghaṁ bhindati, kappaṭṭhikaṁ kibbisaṁ pasavati, kappaṁ nirayamhi paccati.

     Whoever causes a schism in a united Sangha does a bad act with effect for an eon. He’s boiled in hell for an eon.

730. 730

     योyo चca खो,kho देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta भिन्नंbhin·naṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ समग्गंsa·mag·gaṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti ब्रह्मंbrah·maṃ पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ पसवति,pa·sa·va·ti कप्पंkap·paṃ सग्गम्हिsag·gam·hi मोदति।mo·da·ti

     Yo ca kho, devadatta, bhinnaṁ saṅghaṁ samaggaṁ karoti, brahmaṁ puññaṁ pasavati, kappaṁ saggamhi modati.

     But whoever unites a divided Sangha generates the supreme merit. He rejoices in heaven for an eon.

731. 731

     अलं,a·laṃ देवदत्त।de·va·dat·ta

     Alaṁ, devadatta.

     So let it be, Devadatta,

732. 732

     माmā तेte रुच्चिruc·ci सङ्घभेदो।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Mā te rucci saṅghabhedo.

     don’t cause a schism in the Sangha.

733. 733

     गरुकोga·ru·ko खो,kho देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta सङ्घभेदो”ति।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Garuko kho, devadatta, saṅghabhedo”ti.

     It’s a serious matter.”

734. 734

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

     Atha kho āyasmā ānando pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

     Soon afterwards, Venerable Ānanda robed up in the morning, took his bowl and robe, and entered Rājagaha for alms.

735. 735

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तं।ca·ran·taṃ

     Addasā kho devadatto āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ rājagahe piṇḍāya carantaṁ.

     When Devadatta saw him,

736. 736

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Disvāna yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca—

     he went up to him, and said,

737. 737

     “अज्जतग्गेदानाहं,aj·ja·tag·ge·dā·nā·haṃ आवुसोā·vu·so आनन्द,ā·nan·da अञ्ञत्रेवañ·ñat·re·va भगवता,bha·ga·va·tā अञ्ञत्रेवañ·ñat·re·va भिक्खुसङ्घा,bhik·khu·saṅ·ghā उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करिस्सामिka·ris·sā·mi सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करिस्सामी”ति।ka·ris·sā·mī

     “ajjataggedānāhaṁ, āvuso ānanda, aññatreva bhagavatā, aññatreva bhikkhusaṅghā, uposathaṁ karissāmi saṅghakammaṁ karissāmī”ti.

     “From today on, Ānanda, I’ll do the observance-day ceremony and the legal procedures of the Sangha separate from the Buddha and the Sangha of monks.”

738. 738

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरित्वाca·rit·vā पच्छाभत्तंpac·chā·bhat·taṃ पिण्डपातपटिक्कन्तोpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·pa·ṭik·kan·to येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā ānando rājagahe piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     When Ānanda had completed his almsround, eaten his meal, and returned, he went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

739. 739

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him what had happened,

740. 740

     “इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसिं।pā·vi·siṃ

     “idhāhaṁ, bhante, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ.

     (Pāli only)

741. 741

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho मं,maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरन्तं।ca·ran·taṃ

     Addasā kho maṁ, bhante, devadatto rājagahe piṇḍāya carantaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

742. 742

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनाहंye·nā·haṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā मंmaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Disvāna yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā maṁ etadavoca—

     (Pāli only)

743. 743

     ‘अज्जतग्गेदानाहं,aj·ja·tag·ge·dā·nā·haṃ आवुसोā·vu·so आनन्द,ā·nan·da अञ्ञत्रेवañ·ñat·re·va भगवता,bha·ga·va·tā अञ्ञत्रेवañ·ñat·re·va भिक्खुसङ्घा,bhik·khu·saṅ·ghā उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करिस्सामिka·ris·sā·mi सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करिस्सामी’ति।ka·ris·sā·mī

     ‘ajjataggedānāhaṁ, āvuso ānanda, aññatreva bhagavatā, aññatreva bhikkhusaṅghā, uposathaṁ karissāmi saṅghakammaṁ karissāmī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

744. 744

     अज्जतग्गे,aj·ja·tag·ge भन्ते,bhan·te देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दिस्सती”ति।bhin·dis·sa·tī

     Ajjatagge, bhante, devadatto saṅghaṁ bhindissatī”ti.

     adding, “From today, sir, Devadatta has caused a schism in the Sangha.”

745. 745

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā तायंtā·yaṃ वेलायंve·lā·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ उदानंu·dā·naṃ उदानेसि—u·dā·ne·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi—

     Understanding the significance of this, on that occasion the Buddha uttered a heartfelt exclamation:

746. 746

     “सुकरंsu·ka·raṃ साधुनाsā·dhu·nā साधुं,sā·dhuṃ

     “Sukaraṁ sādhunā sādhuṁ,

     “For the good, doing good is easy;

747. 747

     साधुंsā·dhuṃ पापेनpā·pe·na दुक्करं;duk·ka·raṃ

     Sādhuṁ pāpena dukkaraṁ;

     For the bad, doing good is hard.

748. 748

     पापंpā·paṃ पापेनpā·pe·na सुकरं,su·ka·raṃ

     Pāpaṁ pāpena sukaraṁ,

     For the bad, doing evil is easy;

749. 749

     पापमरियेहिpā·pa·ma·ri·ye·hi दुक्करन्”ति।duk·ka·ran

     Pāpamariyehi dukkaran”ti.

     For the noble ones, doing evil is hard.”

750. 750

     दुतियभाणवारोdu·ti·ya·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Dutiyabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

     The second section for recitation is finished.

751. 751

     The third section

752. 752

     3।1। सङ्घभेदकथाsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ka·thā

     3.1. Saṅghabhedakathā

     10. The account of schism in the Sangha

753. 753

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to तदहुपोसथेta·da·hu·po·sa·the उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेसि—gā·he·si

     Atha kho devadatto tadahuposathe uṭṭhāyāsanā salākaṁ gāhesi—

     On the observance day soon afterwards, Devadatta got up from his seat and distributed ballots, saying,

754. 754

     “मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni याचिम्हा—yā·cim·hā

     “mayaṁ, āvuso, samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pañca vatthūni yācimhā—

     “We have gone to the ascetic Gotama and asked for five things:

755. 755

     ‘भगवा,bha·ga·vā भन्ते,bhan·te अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छस्सap·pic·chas·sa …पे…pe

     ‘bhagavā, bhante, anekapariyāyena appicchassa …pe…

     ‘In many ways, sir, you praise fewness of wishes, contentment, self-effacement, ascetic practices, being inspiring, the reduction in things,

756. 756

     वीरियारम्भस्सvī·ri·yā·ram·bhas·sa वण्णवादी।vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī

     vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī.

     and being energetic.

757. 757

     इमानि,i·mā·ni भन्ते,bhan·te पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छतायap·pic·cha·tā·ya …पे…pe

     Imāni, bhante, pañca vatthūni anekapariyāyena appicchatāya …pe…

     And there are five things that lead to just that. It would be good, sir:

758. 758

     वीरियारम्भायvī·ri·yā·ram·bhā·ya संवत्तन्ति।saṃ·vat·tan·ti

     vīriyārambhāya saṁvattanti.

     (Pāli only)

759. 759

     साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ आरञ्ञिकाā·rañ·ñi·kā अस्सु;as·su योyo गामन्तंgā·man·taṃ ओसरेय्य,o·sa·rey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्यphu·sey·ya …पे…pe

     Sādhu, bhante, bhikkhū yāvajīvaṁ āraññikā assu; yo gāmantaṁ osareyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyya …pe…

     If the monks stayed in the wilderness for life, and whoever stayed near inhabited areas would commit an offense,

760. 760

     if they were alms-collectors for life, and whoever accepted an invitation would commit an offense;

761. 761

     if they were rag-robe wearers for life, and whoever accepted robe-cloth from a householder would commit an offense;

762. 762

     if they dwelt at the foot of a tree for life, and whoever took shelter would commit an offense;

763. 763

     यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ मच्छमंसंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ नna खादेय्युं;khā·dey·yuṃ योyo मच्छमंसंmac·cha·maṃ·saṃ खादेय्य,khā·dey·ya वज्जंvaj·jaṃ नंnaṃ फुसेय्या’ति।phu·sey·yā

     yāvajīvaṁ macchamaṁsaṁ na khādeyyuṁ; yo macchamaṁsaṁ khādeyya, vajjaṁ naṁ phuseyyā’ti.

     If they didn’t eat fish or meat for life, and whoever did would commit an offense.’

764. 764

     इमानिi·mā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni समणोsa·ma·ṇo गोतमोgo·ta·mo नानुजानाति।nā·nu·jā·nā·ti

     Imāni pañca vatthūni samaṇo gotamo nānujānāti.

     The ascetic Gotama doesn’t agree to them,

765. 765

     तेte मयंma·yaṃ इमेहिi·me·hi पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi समादायsa·mā·dā·ya वत्ताम।vat·tā·ma

     Te mayaṁ imehi pañcahi vatthūhi samādāya vattāma.

     but we practice in accordance with them.

766. 766

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to इमानिi·mā·ni पञ्चpañ·ca वत्थूनिvat·thū·ni खमन्ति,kha·man·ti सोso सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गण्हातू”ति।gaṇ·hā·tū

     Yassāyasmato imāni pañca vatthūni khamanti, so salākaṁ gaṇhātū”ti.

     Any monk who approves of these five things should vote in favor.”

767. 767

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वेसालिकाve·sā·li·kā वज्जिपुत्तकाvaj·ji·put·ta·kā पञ्चमत्तानिpañ·ca·mat·tā·ni भिक्खुसतानिbhik·khu·sa·tā·ni नवकाna·va·kā चेवce·va होन्तिhon·ti अप्पकतञ्ञुनोap·pa·ka·tañ·ñu·no च।ca

     Tena kho pana samayena vesālikā vajjiputtakā pañcamattāni bhikkhusatāni navakā ceva honti appakataññuno ca.

     On that occasion five hundred Vajjian monks from Vesālī, newly ordained and ignorant, were present.

768. 768

     ते—“अयंte धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनन्”तिsat·thu·sā·sa·nan सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गण्हिंसु।gaṇ·hiṃ·su

     Te—“ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanan”ti salākaṁ gaṇhiṁsu.

     Thinking, “This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction,” they voted in favor.

769. 769

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दित्वाbhin·dit·vā पञ्चमत्तानिpañ·ca·mat·tā·ni भिक्खुसतानिbhik·khu·sa·tā·ni आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na गयासीसंga·yā·sī·saṃ तेनte·na पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho devadatto saṅghaṁ bhinditvā pañcamattāni bhikkhusatāni ādāya yena gayāsīsaṁ tena pakkāmi.

     Then, after causing a schism in the Sangha, Devadatta left for Gayāsīsa together with the five hundred monks.

770. 770

     अथa·tha खोkho सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानाsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

     Atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

     Soon afterwards Sāriputta and Moggallāna went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

771. 771

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and said,

772. 772

     “देवदत्तो,de·va·dat·to भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दित्वाbhin·dit·vā पञ्चमत्तानिpañ·ca·mat·tā·ni भिक्खुसतानिbhik·khu·sa·tā·ni आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na गयासीसंga·yā·sī·saṃ तेनte·na पक्कन्तो”ति।pak·kan·to

     “devadatto, bhante, saṅghaṁ bhinditvā pañcamattāni bhikkhusatāni ādāya yena gayāsīsaṁ tena pakkanto”ti.

     “Sir, Devadatta has split the Sangha and left for Gayāsīsa together with five hundred monks.”

773. 773

     “नna हिhi नामnā·ma तुम्हाकं,tum·hā·kaṃ सारिपुत्ता,sā·ri·put·tā तेसुte·su नवकेसुna·va·ke·su भिक्खूसुbhik·khū·su कारुञ्ञम्पिkā·ruñ·ñam·pi भविस्सति?bha·vis·sa·ti

     “Na hi nāma tumhākaṁ, sāriputtā, tesu navakesu bhikkhūsu kāruññampi bhavissati?

     “You have compassion for those five hundred newly ordained monks, don’t you?

774. 774

     गच्छथgac·cha·tha तुम्हे,tum·he सारिपुत्ता,sā·ri·put·tā पुराpu·rā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपज्जन्ती”ति।ā·paj·jan·tī

     Gacchatha tumhe, sāriputtā, purā te bhikkhū anayabyasanaṁ āpajjantī”ti.

     Go then, Sāriputta and Moggallāna, before they’re afflicted with misfortune and disaster.”

775. 775

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानाsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā येनye·na गयासीसंga·yā·sī·saṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho sāriputtamoggallānā bhagavato paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena gayāsīsaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

     Saying, “Yes, sir,” they got up from their seats, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with their right sides toward him, and went to Gayāsīsa.

776. 776

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अविदूरेa·vi·dū·re रोदमानोro·da·mā·no ठितोṭhi·to होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu bhagavato avidūre rodamāno ṭhito hoti.

     Just then a certain monk who was standing near the Buddha was crying.

777. 777

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho bhagavā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca—

     The Buddha asked him why.

778. 778

     “किस्सkis·sa त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu रोदसी”ति?ro·da·sī

     “kissa tvaṁ, bhikkhu, rodasī”ti?

     (Pāli only)

779. 779

     “येपिye·pi ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अग्गसावकाag·ga·sā·va·kā सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानाsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā तेपिte·pi देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke गच्छन्तिgac·chan·ti देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa धम्मंdham·maṃ रोचेन्ता”ति।ro·cen·tā

     “Yepi te, bhante, bhagavato aggasāvakā sāriputtamoggallānā tepi devadattassa santike gacchanti devadattassa dhammaṁ rocentā”ti.

     He said, “Sir, even Sāriputta and Moggallāna, the Buddha’s chief disciples, are going to Devadatta because they approve of his teaching.”

780. 780

     “अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu अनवकासो,a·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानाsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa धम्मंdham·maṃ रोचेय्युं,ro·cey·yuṃ अपिa·pi चca तेte गताga·tā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सञ्ञत्तिया”ति।sañ·ñat·ti·yā

     “Aṭṭhānametaṁ, bhikkhu, anavakāso, yaṁ sāriputtamoggallānā devadattassa dhammaṁ roceyyuṁ, api ca te gatā bhikkhūnaṁ saññattiyā”ti.

     “It’s impossible for Sāriputta and Moggallāna to approve of Devadatta’s teaching. In fact, they’ve gone to win those monks over.”

781. 781

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to महतियाma·ha·ti·yā परिसायpa·ri·sā·ya परिवुतोpa·ri·vu·to धम्मंdham·maṃ देसेन्तोde·sen·to निसिन्नोni·sin·no होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena devadatto mahatiyā parisāya parivuto dhammaṁ desento nisinno hoti.

     At that time Devadatta was seated giving a teaching surrounded by a large gathering.

782. 782

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानेsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·ne दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्ते।ā·gac·chan·te

     Addasā kho devadatto sāriputtamoggallāne dūratova āgacchante.

     When Devadatta saw Sāriputta and Moggallāna coming,

783. 783

     दिस्वानdis·vā·na भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Disvāna bhikkhū āmantesi—

     he said to his monks,

784. 784

     “पस्सथ,pas·sa·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यावyā·va स्वाक्खातोsvāk·khā·to मयाma·yā धम्मो,dham·mo येपिye·pi तेte समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa अग्गसावकाag·ga·sā·va·kā सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानाsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā तेपिte·pi ममma·ma सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke आगच्छन्ति।ā·gac·chan·ti

     “passatha, bhikkhave, yāva svākkhāto mayā dhammo, yepi te samaṇassa gotamassa aggasāvakā sāriputtamoggallānā tepi mama santike āgacchanti.

     “See how well-taught my teaching is, as even Sāriputta and Moggallāna, the ascetic Gotama’s chief disciples, are coming here

785. 785

     ममma·ma धम्मंdham·maṃ रोचेन्ता”ति।ro·cen·tā

     Mama dhammaṁ rocentā”ti.

     because they approve of it.”

786. 786

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te कोकालिकोko·kā·li·ko देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Evaṁ vutte, kokāliko devadattaṁ etadavoca—

     But Kokālika said,

787. 787

     “मा,mā आवुसोā·vu·so देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानेsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·ne विस्ससि।vis·sa·si

     “mā, āvuso devadatta, sāriputtamoggallāne vissasi.

     “Don’t trust Sāriputta and Moggallāna.

788. 788

     पापिच्छाpā·pic·chā सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लाना,sā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā पापिकानंpā·pi·kā·naṃ इच्छानंic·chā·naṃ वसंva·saṃ गता”ति।ga·tā

     Pāpicchā sāriputtamoggallānā, pāpikānaṁ icchānaṁ vasaṁ gatā”ti.

     They have bad desires. They’re in the grip of bad desires.”

789. 789

     “अलं,a·laṃ आवुसो।ā·vu·so

     “Alaṁ, āvuso.

     “Don’t worry.

790. 790

     स्वागतंsvā·ga·taṃ तेसंte·saṃ यतोya·to मेme धम्मंdham·maṃ रोचेन्ती”ति।ro·cen·tī

     Svāgataṁ tesaṁ yato me dhammaṁ rocentī”ti.

     Anyone who comes to approve of my teaching is welcome.”

791. 791

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ उपड्ढासनेनu·paḍ·ḍhā·sa·ne·na निमन्तेसि—ni·man·te·si

     Atha kho devadatto āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ upaḍḍhāsanena nimantesi—

     Devadatta invited Venerable Sāriputta

792. 792

     “एहावुसोe·hā·vu·so सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta इधi·dha निसीदाही”ति।ni·sī·dā·hī

     “ehāvuso sāriputta, idha nisīdāhī”ti.

     to sit on a seat half the height of his own.

793. 793

     “अलं,a·laṃ आवुसो”तिā·vu·so खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ आसनंā·sa·naṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     “Alaṁ, āvuso”ti kho āyasmā sāriputto aññataraṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Saying, “There’s no need,” Sāriputta took another seat and sat down to one side,

794. 794

     आयस्मापिā·yas·mā·pi खोkho महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ आसनंā·sa·naṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Āyasmāpi kho mahāmoggallāno aññataraṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     as did Mahāmoggallāna.

795. 795

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to बहुदेवba·hu·de·va रत्तिंrat·tiṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ सारिपुत्तंsā·ri·put·taṃ अज्झेसि—aj·jhe·si

     Atha kho devadatto bahudeva rattiṁ bhikkhū dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ ajjhesi—

     After spending most of the night instructing, inspiring, and gladdening the monks with a teaching, Devadatta invited Sāriputta, saying

796. 796

     “विगतथिनमिद्धोvi·ga·ta·thi·na·mid·dho खो,kho आवुसोā·vu·so सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खुसङ्घो।bhik·khu·saṅ·gho

     “vigatathinamiddho kho, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhusaṅgho.

     “The Sangha of monks is without dullness and drowsiness.

797. 797

     पटिभातुpa·ṭi·bhā·tu तं,taṃ आवुसोā·vu·so सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ धम्मीdham·mī कथा,ka·thā पिट्ठिpiṭ·ṭhi मेme आगिलायति,ā·gi·lā·ya·ti तमहंta·ma·haṃ आयमिस्सामी”ति।ā·ya·mis·sā·mī

     Paṭibhātu taṁ, āvuso sāriputta, bhikkhūnaṁ dhammī kathā, piṭṭhi me āgilāyati, tamahaṁ āyamissāmī”ti.

     Give a teaching, Sāriputta. My back is aching. I need to stretch it.”

798. 798

     “एवमावुसो”तिe·va·mā·vu·so खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā sāriputto devadattassa paccassosi.

     “Yes.”

799. 799

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to चतुग्गुणंca·tug·gu·ṇaṃ सङ्घाटिंsaṅ·ghā·ṭiṃ पञ्ञपेत्वाpañ·ña·pet·vā दक्खिणेनdak·khi·ṇe·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सेय्यंsey·yaṃ कप्पेसि।kap·pe·si

     Atha kho devadatto catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapetvā dakkhiṇena passena seyyaṁ kappesi.

     Devadatta then folded his upper robe in four and lay down on his right side.

800. 800

     तस्सtas·sa किलमन्तस्सki·la·man·tas·sa मुट्ठस्सतिस्सmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tis·sa असम्पजानस्सa·sam·pa·jā·nas·sa मुहुत्तकेनेवmu·hut·ta·ke·ne·va निद्दाnid·dā ओक्कमि।ok·ka·mi

     Tassa kilamantassa muṭṭhassatissa asampajānassa muhuttakeneva niddā okkami.

     Because he was tired, absentminded, and heedless, he fell asleep immediately.

801. 801

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to आदेसनापाटिहारियानुसासनियाā·de·sa·nā·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yā·nu·sā·sa·ni·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya ओवदिo·va·di अनुसासि।a·nu·sā·si

     Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto ādesanāpāṭihāriyānusāsaniyā bhikkhū dhammiyā kathāya ovadi anusāsi.

     Venerable Sāriputta then used the wonder of mind reading to instruct those monks,

802. 802

     आयस्माā·yas·mā महामोग्गल्लानोma·hā·mog·gal·lā·no इद्धिपाटिहारियानुसासनियाid·dhi·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yā·nu·sā·sa·ni·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya ओवदिo·va·di अनुसासि।a·nu·sā·si

     Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno iddhipāṭihāriyānusāsaniyā bhikkhū dhammiyā kathāya ovadi anusāsi.

     and Venerable Mahāmoggallāna used the wonder of supernormal powers to the same effect.

803. 803

     अथa·tha खोkho तेसंte·saṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā सारिपुत्तेनsā·ri·put·te·na आदेसनापाटिहारियानुसासनियाā·de·sa·nā·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yā·nu·sā·sa·ni·yā आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā चca महामोग्गल्लानेनma·hā·mog·gal·lā·ne·na इद्धिपाटिहारियानुसासनियाid·dhi·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yā·nu·sā·sa·ni·yā ओवदियमानानंo·va·di·ya·mā·nā·naṃ अनुसासियमानानंa·nu·sā·si·ya·mā·nā·naṃ विरजंvi·ra·jaṃ वीतमलंvī·ta·ma·laṃ धम्मचक्खुंdham·ma·cak·khuṃ उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

     Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ āyasmatā sāriputtena ādesanāpāṭihāriyānusāsaniyā āyasmatā ca mahāmoggallānena iddhipāṭihāriyānusāsaniyā ovadiyamānānaṁ anusāsiyamānānaṁ virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi—

     While they were being instructed like this, they experienced the stainless vision of the Truth:

804. 804

     “यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci समुदयधम्मंsa·mu·da·ya·dham·maṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ निरोधधम्मन्”ति।ni·ro·dha·dham·man

     “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.

     “Anything that has a beginning has an end.”

805. 805

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū āmantesi—

     And Sāriputta addressed them:

806. 806

     “गच्छामgac·chā·ma मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवतोbha·ga·va·to सन्तिके।san·ti·ke

     “gacchāma mayaṁ, āvuso, bhagavato santike.

     “We’re going to the Buddha.

807. 807

     योyo तस्सtas·sa भगवतोbha·ga·va·to धम्मंdham·maṃ रोचेसिro·ce·si सोso आगच्छतू”ति।ā·gac·cha·tū

     Yo tassa bhagavato dhammaṁ rocesi so āgacchatū”ti.

     Whoever approves of the Teaching of the Buddha should come along.”

808. 808

     अथa·tha खोkho सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानाsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā तानिtā·ni पञ्चभिक्खुसतानिpañ·ca·bhik·khu·sa·tā·ni आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na वेळुवनंve·ḷu·va·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

     Atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā tāni pañcabhikkhusatāni ādāya yena veḷuvanaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

     Sāriputta and Moggallāna then went to the Bamboo Grove accompanied by those five hundred monks.

809. 809

     अथa·tha खोkho कोकालिकोko·kā·li·ko देवदत्तंde·va·dat·taṃ उट्ठापेसि—uṭ·ṭhā·pe·si

     Atha kho kokāliko devadattaṁ uṭṭhāpesi—

     In the meantime Kokālika woke up Devadatta, saying,

810. 810

     “उट्ठेहि,uṭ·ṭhe·hi आवुसोā·vu·so देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta नीताnī·tā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानेहि।sā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·ne·hi

     “uṭṭhehi, āvuso devadatta, nītā te bhikkhū sāriputtamoggallānehi.

     “Get up, Devadatta, your monks are being led away by Sāriputta and Moggallāna.

811. 811

     ननुna·nu त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta मयाma·yā वुत्तो—vut·to

     Nanu tvaṁ, āvuso devadatta, mayā vutto—

     Didn’t I tell you

812. 812

     ‘मा,mā आवुसोā·vu·so देवदत्त,de·va·dat·ta सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानेsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·ne विस्सासि।vis·sā·si

     ‘mā, āvuso devadatta, sāriputtamoggallāne vissāsi.

     not to trust Sāriputta and Moggallāna?

813. 813

     पापिच्छाpā·pic·chā सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लाना,sā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā पापिकानंpā·pi·kā·naṃ इच्छानंic·chā·naṃ वसंva·saṃ गता’”ति?ga·tā

     Pāpicchā sāriputtamoggallānā, pāpikānaṁ icchānaṁ vasaṁ gatā’”ti?

     Didn’t I say that they have bad desires, that they are in the grip of bad desires?”

814. 814

     अथa·tha खोkho देवदत्तस्सde·va·dat·tas·sa तत्थेवtat·the·va उण्हंuṇ·haṃ लोहितंlo·hi·taṃ मुखतोmu·kha·to उग्गञ्छि।ug·gañ·chi

     Atha kho devadattassa tattheva uṇhaṁ lohitaṁ mukhato uggañchi.

     And Devadatta vomited hot blood right there.

815. 815

     अथa·tha खोkho सारिपुत्तमोग्गल्लानाsā·ri·put·ta·mog·gal·lā·nā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिसुं।ni·sī·di·suṃ

     Atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdisuṁ.

     Sāriputta and Moggallāna then went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

816. 816

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and said,

817. 817

     “साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भेदकानुवत्तकाbhe·da·kā·nu·vat·ta·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū पुनpu·na उपसम्पज्जेय्युन्”ति।u·pa·sam·paj·jey·yun

     “sādhu, bhante, bhedakānuvattakā bhikkhū puna upasampajjeyyun”ti.

     “Sir, may we reordain the monks who supported the schism?”

818. 818

     “अलं,a·laṃ सारिपुत्त।sā·ri·put·ta

     “Alaṁ, sāriputta.

     “Let it be, Sāriputta,

819. 819

     माmā तेte रुच्चिruc·ci भेदकानुवत्तकानंbhe·da·kā·nu·vat·ta·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पुनpu·na उपसम्पदा।u·pa·sam·pa·dā

     Mā te rucci bhedakānuvattakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ puna upasampadā.

     don’t think of reordaining the monks who supported the schism.

820. 820

     तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भेदकानुवत्तकेbhe·da·kā·nu·vat·ta·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū थुल्लच्चयंthul·lac·ca·yaṃ देसापेहि।de·sā·pe·hi

     Tena hi tvaṁ, sāriputta, bhedakānuvattake bhikkhū thullaccayaṁ desāpehi.

     Instead, have them confess a serious offense.

821. 821

     कथंka·thaṃ पनpa·na ते,te सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to पटिपज्जी”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·jī

     Kathaṁ pana te, sāriputta, devadatto paṭipajjī”ti?

     And Devadatta, how did he treat you?”

822. 822

     “यथेव,ya·the·va भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā बहुदेवba·hu·de·va रत्तिंrat·tiṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेत्वाsan·das·set·vā समादपेत्वाsa·mā·da·pet·vā समुत्तेजेत्वाsa·mut·te·jet·vā सम्पहंसेत्वाsam·pa·haṃ·set·vā मंmaṃ अज्झेसति—aj·jhe·sa·ti

     “Yatheva, bhante, bhagavā bahudeva rattiṁ bhikkhū dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā maṁ ajjhesati—

     “Just as you, sir, spend most of the night instructing, inspiring, and gladdening the monks with a teaching, and then invite me, saying,

823. 823

     ‘विगतथिनमिद्धोvi·ga·ta·thi·na·mid·dho खो,kho सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खुसङ्घो;bhik·khu·saṅ·gho

     ‘vigatathinamiddho kho, sāriputta, bhikkhusaṅgho;

     ‘The Sangha of monks is without dullness and drowsiness.

824. 824

     पटिभातुpa·ṭi·bhā·tu तं,taṃ सारिपुत्त,sā·ri·put·ta भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ धम्मीdham·mī कथा,ka·thā पिट्ठिpiṭ·ṭhi मेme आगिलायति,ā·gi·lā·ya·ti तमहंta·ma·haṃ आयमिस्सामी’ति।ā·ya·mis·sā·mī

     paṭibhātu taṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhūnaṁ dhammī kathā, piṭṭhi me āgilāyati, tamahaṁ āyamissāmī’ti.

     Give a teaching, Sāriputta. My back is aching. I need to stretch it,’

825. 825

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to पटिपज्जी”ति।pa·ṭi·paj·jī

     Evameva kho, bhante, devadatto paṭipajjī”ti.

     that’s how Devadatta treated us.”

826. 826

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     The Buddha then addressed the monks:

827. 827

     “भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अरञ्ञायतनेa·rañ·ñā·ya·ta·ne महासरसी।ma·hā·sa·ra·sī

     “bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, araññāyatane mahāsarasī.

     “Once upon a time there was a great lake in a wilderness area

828. 828

     तंtaṃ नागाnā·gā उपनिस्सायu·pa·nis·sā·ya विहरिंसु।vi·ha·riṃ·su

     Taṁ nāgā upanissāya vihariṁsu.

     with elephants living nearby.

829. 829

     तेte तंtaṃ सरसिंsa·ra·siṃ ओगाहेत्वा,o·gā·het·vā सोण्डायsoṇ·ḍā·ya भिसमुळालंbhi·sa·mu·ḷā·laṃ अब्बुहित्वा,ab·bu·hit·vā सुविक्खालितंsu·vik·khā·li·taṃ विक्खालेत्वा,vik·khā·let·vā अकद्दमंa·kad·da·maṃ सङ्खादित्वाsaṅ·khā·dit·vā अज्झोहरन्ति।aj·jho·ha·ran·ti

     Te taṁ sarasiṁ ogāhetvā, soṇḍāya bhisamuḷālaṁ abbuhitvā, suvikkhālitaṁ vikkhāletvā, akaddamaṁ saṅkhāditvā ajjhoharanti.

     After plunging into the lake, they pulled up lotus roots and tubers with their trunks. They gave them a good rinse to remove the mud, before chewing and swallowing them.

830. 830

     तेसंte·saṃ तंtaṃ वण्णायvaṇ·ṇā·ya चेवce·va होति,ho·ti बलायba·lā·ya च।ca

     Tesaṁ taṁ vaṇṇāya ceva hoti, balāya ca.

     That gave them beauty and strength.

831. 831

     नna चca ततोनिदानंta·to·ni·dā·naṃ मरणंma·ra·ṇaṃ वाvā निगच्छन्ति,ni·gac·chan·ti मरणमत्तंma·ra·ṇa·mat·taṃ वाvā दुक्खं।duk·khaṃ

     Na ca tatonidānaṁ maraṇaṁ vā nigacchanti, maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ.

     And they didn’t die or experience death-like suffering because of that.

832. 832

     तेसंयेवte·saṃ·ye·va खोkho पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve महानागानंma·hā·nā·gā·naṃ अनुसिक्खमानाa·nu·sik·kha·mā·nā तरुणाta·ru·ṇā भिङ्कच्छापा।bhiṅ·kac·chā·pā

     Tesaṁyeva kho pana, bhikkhave, mahānāgānaṁ anusikkhamānā taruṇā bhiṅkacchāpā.

     Then the baby elephants tried to imitate those great elephants.

833. 833

     तेte तंtaṃ सरसिंsa·ra·siṃ ओगाहेत्वा,o·gā·het·vā सोण्डायsoṇ·ḍā·ya भिसमुळालंbhi·sa·mu·ḷā·laṃ अब्बुहित्वा,ab·bu·hit·vā नna सुविक्खालितंsu·vik·khā·li·taṃ विक्खालेत्वा,vik·khā·let·vā सकद्दमंsa·kad·da·maṃ सङ्खादित्वा,saṅ·khā·dit·vā अज्झोहरन्ति।aj·jho·ha·ran·ti

     Te taṁ sarasiṁ ogāhetvā, soṇḍāya bhisamuḷālaṁ abbuhitvā, na suvikkhālitaṁ vikkhāletvā, sakaddamaṁ saṅkhāditvā, ajjhoharanti.

     After plunging into the lake, they pulled up lotus roots and tubers with their trunks. But they didn’t give them a good rinse to remove the mud, and so they chewed and swallowed them while muddy.

834. 834

     तेसंte·saṃ तंtaṃ नेवne·va वण्णायvaṇ·ṇā·ya होति,ho·ti नna बलाय।ba·lā·ya

     Tesaṁ taṁ neva vaṇṇāya hoti, na balāya.

     That didn’t give them any beauty or strength.

835. 835

     ततोनिदानञ्चta·to·ni·dā·nañ·ca मरणंma·ra·ṇaṃ वाvā निगच्छन्ति,ni·gac·chan·ti मरणमत्तंma·ra·ṇa·mat·taṃ वाvā दुक्खं।duk·khaṃ

     Tatonidānañca maraṇaṁ vā nigacchanti, maraṇamattaṁ vā dukkhaṁ.

     And they died or experienced death-like suffering because of that.

836. 836

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to ममानुक्रुब्बंma·mā·nuk·rub·baṃ कपणोka·pa·ṇo मरिस्सतीति।ma·ris·sa·tī·ti

     Evameva kho, bhikkhave, devadatto mamānukrubbaṁ kapaṇo marissatīti.

     Just so, by imitating me, Devadatta will die miserably.

837. 837

     महावराहस्सma·hā·va·rā·has·sa महिंma·hiṃ विक्रुब्बतो,vik·rub·ba·to

     Mahāvarāhassa mahiṁ vikrubbato,

     ‘While the great being removes the earth,

838. 838

     भिसंbhi·saṃ घसानस्सgha·sā·nas·sa नदीसुna·dī·su जग्गतो;jag·ga·to

     Bhisaṁ ghasānassa nadīsu jaggato;

     Eats the tuber, and is alert in the rivers,

839. 839

     भिङ्कोवbhiṅ·ko·va पङ्कंpaṅ·kaṃ अभिभक्खयित्वा,a·bhi·bhak·kha·yit·vā

     Bhiṅkova paṅkaṁ abhibhakkhayitvā,

     He’s like a baby elephant that’s eaten mud:

840. 840

     ममानुक्रुब्बंma·mā·nuk·rub·baṃ कपणोka·pa·ṇo मरिस्सतीति।ma·ris·sa·tī·ti

     Mamānukrubbaṁ kapaṇo marissatīti.

     By imitating me, he’ll die miserably.’

841. 841

     अट्ठहि,aṭ·ṭha·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to भिक्खुbhik·khu दूतेय्यंdū·tey·yaṃ गन्तुमरहति।gan·tu·ma·ra·ha·ti

     Aṭṭhahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu dūteyyaṁ gantumarahati.

     “Monks, a monk who has eight qualities is qualified to take messages.

842. 842

     कतमेहिka·ta·me·hi अट्ठहि?aṭ·ṭha·hi

     Katamehi aṭṭhahi?

     (Pāli only)

843. 843

     इध,i·dha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu सोताso·tā चca होति,ho·ti सावेताsā·ve·tā च,ca उग्गहेताug·ga·he·tā च,ca धारेताdhā·re·tā च,ca विञ्ञाताviñ·ñā·tā च,ca विञ्ञापेताviñ·ñā·pe·tā च,ca कुसलोku·sa·lo चca सहितासहितस्स,sa·hi·tā·sa·hi·tas·sa नोno चca कलहकारको—ka·la·ha·kā·ra·ko

     Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sotā ca hoti, sāvetā ca, uggahetā ca, dhāretā ca, viññātā ca, viññāpetā ca, kusalo ca sahitāsahitassa, no ca kalahakārako—

     He listens and communicates, he learns and remembers, he understands and gets things across, he’s skilled in what is and what isn’t relevant, he’s not argumentative.

844. 844

     इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठहङ्गेहिaṭ·ṭha·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to भिक्खुbhik·khu दूतेय्यंdū·tey·yaṃ गन्तुमरहति।gan·tu·ma·ra·ha·ti

     imehi kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu dūteyyaṁ gantumarahati.

     (Pāli only)

845. 845

     अट्ठहि,aṭ·ṭha·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to दूतेय्यंdū·tey·yaṃ गन्तुमरहति।gan·tu·ma·ra·ha·ti

     Aṭṭhahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato sāriputto dūteyyaṁ gantumarahati.

     (Pāli only)

846. 846

     कतमेहिka·ta·me·hi अट्ठहि?aṭ·ṭha·hi

     Katamehi aṭṭhahi?

     (Pāli only)

847. 847

     इध,i·dha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to सोताso·tā चca होति,ho·ti सावेताsā·ve·tā च,ca उग्गहेताug·ga·he·tā च,ca धारेताdhā·re·tā च,ca विञ्ञाताviñ·ñā·tā च,ca विञ्ञापेताviñ·ñā·pe·tā च,ca कुसलोku·sa·lo चca सहितासहितस्स,sa·hi·tā·sa·hi·tas·sa नोno चca कलहकारको—ka·la·ha·kā·ra·ko

     Idha, bhikkhave, sāriputto sotā ca hoti, sāvetā ca, uggahetā ca, dhāretā ca, viññātā ca, viññāpetā ca, kusalo ca sahitāsahitassa, no ca kalahakārako—

     (Pāli only)

848. 848

     इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठहङ्गेहिaṭ·ṭha·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to दूतेय्यंdū·tey·yaṃ गन्तुमरहतीति।gan·tu·ma·ra·ha·tī·ti

     imehi kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato sāriputto dūteyyaṁ gantumarahatīti.

     Because he has these eight qualities, Sāriputta is qualified to take messages.

849. 849

     योyo वेve नna ब्यथतिbya·tha·ti पत्वा,pat·vā

     Yo ve na byathati patvā,

     ‘He doesn’t tremble when faced

850. 850

     परिसंpa·ri·saṃ उग्गवादिनिं;ug·ga·vā·di·niṃ

     parisaṁ uggavādiniṁ;

     With a gathering of fierce debaters.

851. 851

     नna चca हापेतिhā·pe·ti वचनं,va·ca·naṃ

     Na ca hāpeti vacanaṁ,

     He doesn’t neglect the words

852. 852

     नna चca छादेतिchā·de·ti सासनं।sā·sa·naṃ

     na ca chādeti sāsanaṁ.

     Or fail to get the instruction across.

853. 853

     असन्दिद्धोa·san·did·dho चca अक्खाति,ak·khā·ti

     Asandiddho ca akkhāti,

     He speaks with confidence

854. 854

     पुच्छितोpuc·chi·to चca नna कुप्पति;kup·pa·ti

     Pucchito ca na kuppati;

     And isn’t agitated when questioned.

855. 855

     सsa वेve तादिसकोtā·di·sa·ko भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     Sa ve tādisako bhikkhu,

     This kind of monk, indeed,

856. 856

     दूतेय्यंdū·tey·yaṃ गन्तुमरहतीति।gan·tu·ma·ra·ha·tī·ti

     Dūteyyaṁ gantumarahatīti.

     Is qualified to take messages.’

857. 857

     अट्ठहि,aṭ·ṭha·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve असद्धम्मेहिa·sad·dham·me·hi अभिभूतोa·bhi·bhū·to परियादिन्नचित्तोpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·to देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आपायिकोā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिकोne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठोkap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो।a·te·kic·cho

     Aṭṭhahi, bhikkhave, asaddhammehi abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto devadatto āpāyiko nerayiko kappaṭṭho atekiccho.

     “It’s because he’s overcome and consumed by eight bad qualities that Devadatta is irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.

858. 858

     कतमेहिka·ta·me·hi अट्ठहि?aṭ·ṭha·hi

     Katamehi aṭṭhahi?

     What eight?

859. 859

     लाभेन,lā·bhe·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अभिभूतोa·bhi·bhū·to परियादिन्नचित्तोpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·to देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आपायिकोā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिकोne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठोkap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो;a·te·kic·cho

     Lābhena, bhikkhave, abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto devadatto āpāyiko nerayiko kappaṭṭho atekiccho;

     Material support,

860. 860

     अलाभेन,a·lā·bhe·na भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

     alābhena, bhikkhave …pe…

     lack of material support,

861. 861

     यसेन,ya·se·na भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

     yasena, bhikkhave …pe…

     being popular,

862. 862

     अयसेन,a·ya·se·na भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

     ayasena, bhikkhave …pe…

     being unpopular,

863. 863

     सक्कारेन,sak·kā·re·na भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

     sakkārena, bhikkhave …pe…

     honor,

864. 864

     असक्कारेन,a·sak·kā·re·na भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

     asakkārena, bhikkhave …pe…

     lack of honor,

865. 865

     पापिच्छताय,pā·pic·cha·tā·ya भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

     pāpicchatāya, bhikkhave …pe…

     bad desires,

866. 866

     पापमित्ततायpā·pa·mit·ta·tā·ya भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अभिभूतोa·bhi·bhū·to परियादिन्नचित्तोpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·to देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आपायिकोā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिकोne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठोkap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो—a·te·kic·cho

     pāpamittatāya bhikkhave, abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto devadatto āpāyiko nerayiko kappaṭṭho atekiccho—

     and bad friendship.

867. 867

     इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठहिaṭ·ṭha·hi असद्धम्मेहिa·sad·dham·me·hi अभिभूतोa·bhi·bhū·to परियादिन्नचित्तोpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·to देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आपायिकोā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिकोne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठोkap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो।a·te·kic·cho

     imehi kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭhahi asaddhammehi abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto devadatto āpāyiko nerayiko kappaṭṭho atekiccho.

     (Pāli only)

868. 868

     साधु,sā·dhu भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ लाभंlā·bhaṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरेय्य,vi·ha·rey·ya उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अलाभंa·lā·bhaṃ …पे…pe

     Sādhu, bhikkhave, bhikkhu uppannaṁ lābhaṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya vihareyya, uppannaṁ alābhaṁ …pe…

     It’s good for a monk to overcome whatever material support he’s affected by, whatever lack of material support he’s affected by,

869. 869

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ यसंya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ yasaṁ …

     whatever popularity he’s affected by,

870. 870

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अयसंa·ya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ ayasaṁ …

     whatever unpopularity he’s affected by,

871. 871

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ सक्कारंsak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ sakkāraṁ …

     whatever honor he’s affected by,

872. 872

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ असक्कारंa·sak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ asakkāraṁ …

     whatever lack of honor he’s affected by,

873. 873

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापिच्छतंpā·pic·cha·taṃ …

     uppannaṁ pāpicchataṁ …

     whatever bad desires he’s affected by,

874. 874

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापमित्ततंpā·pa·mit·ta·taṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरेय्य।vi·ha·rey·ya

     uppannaṁ pāpamittataṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya vihareyya.

     and whatever bad friendship he’s affected by.

875. 875

     कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ पटिच्चpa·ṭic·ca उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ लाभंlā·bhaṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरेय्य,vi·ha·rey·ya उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अलाभंa·lā·bhaṃ …पे…pe

     Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu atthavasaṁ paṭicca uppannaṁ lābhaṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya vihareyya, uppannaṁ alābhaṁ …pe…

     For what reason should a monk overcome these things?

876. 876

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ यसंya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ yasaṁ …

     (Pāli only)

877. 877

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अयसंa·ya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ ayasaṁ …

     (Pāli only)

878. 878

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ सक्कारंsak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ sakkāraṁ …

     (Pāli only)

879. 879

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ असक्कारंa·sak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ asakkāraṁ …

     (Pāli only)

880. 880

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापिच्छतंpā·pic·cha·taṃ …

     uppannaṁ pāpicchataṁ …

     (Pāli only)

881. 881

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापमित्ततंpā·pa·mit·ta·taṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरेय्य?vi·ha·rey·ya

     uppannaṁ pāpamittataṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya vihareyya?

     (Pāli only)

882. 882

     यंyaṃ हिस्स,his·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ लाभंlā·bhaṃ अनभिभुय्यa·na·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरतोvi·ha·ra·to उप्पज्जेय्युंup·paj·jey·yuṃ आसवाā·sa·vā विघातपरिळाहा,vi·ghā·ta·pa·ri·ḷā·hā उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ लाभंlā·bhaṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरतोvi·ha·ra·to एवंसतेe·vaṃ·sa·te आसवाā·sa·vā विघातपरिळाहाvi·ghā·ta·pa·ri·ḷā·hā नna होन्ति।hon·ti

     Yaṁ hissa, bhikkhave, uppannaṁ lābhaṁ anabhibhuyya viharato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, uppannaṁ lābhaṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharato evaṁsate āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti.

     If he doesn’t overcome whatever material support he’s affected by, he will experience distressful and feverish corruptions. But if he overcomes whatever material support he’s affected by, he won’t have those distressful and feverish corruptions.

883. 883

     यंyaṃ हिस्स,his·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अलाभंa·lā·bhaṃ …पे…pe

     Yaṁ hissa, bhikkhave, uppannaṁ alābhaṁ …pe…

     If he doesn’t overcome whatever lack of material support he’s affected by,

884. 884

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ यसंya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ yasaṁ …

     whatever popularity he’s affected by,

885. 885

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अयसंa·ya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ ayasaṁ …

     whatever unpopularity he’s affected by,

886. 886

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ सक्कारंsak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ sakkāraṁ …

     whatever honor he’s affected by,

887. 887

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ असक्कारंa·sak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ asakkāraṁ …

     whatever lack of honor he’s affected by,

888. 888

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापिच्छतंpā·pic·cha·taṃ …

     uppannaṁ pāpicchataṁ …

     whatever bad desires he’s affected by,

889. 889

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापमित्ततंpā·pa·mit·ta·taṃ अनभिभुय्यa·na·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरतोvi·ha·ra·to उप्पज्जेय्युंup·paj·jey·yuṃ आसवाā·sa·vā विघातपरिळाहा,vi·ghā·ta·pa·ri·ḷā·hā उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापमित्ततंpā·pa·mit·ta·taṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरतोvi·ha·ra·to एवंसतेe·vaṃ·sa·te आसवाā·sa·vā विघातपरिळाहाvi·ghā·ta·pa·ri·ḷā·hā नna होन्ति।hon·ti

     uppannaṁ pāpamittataṁ anabhibhuyya viharato uppajjeyyuṁ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, uppannaṁ pāpamittataṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharato evaṁsate āsavā vighātapariḷāhā na honti.

     or whatever bad friendship he’s affected by, he will experience distressful and feverish corruptions. But if he overcomes whatever bad friendship he’s affected by, he won’t have those distressful and feverish corruptions.

890. 890

     इदंi·daṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ पटिच्चpa·ṭic·ca उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ लाभंlā·bhaṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरेय्य,vi·ha·rey·ya उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अलाभंa·lā·bhaṃ …पे…pe

     Idaṁ kho, bhikkhave, atthavasaṁ paṭicca uppannaṁ lābhaṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya vihareyya, uppannaṁ alābhaṁ …pe…

     And so, you should overcome whatever material support you’re affected by, whatever lack of material support you’re affected by,

891. 891

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ यसंya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ yasaṁ …

     whatever popularity you’re affected by,

892. 892

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अयसंa·ya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ ayasaṁ …

     whatever unpopularity you’re affected by,

893. 893

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ सक्कारंsak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ sakkāraṁ …

     whatever honor you’re affected by,

894. 894

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ असक्कारंa·sak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ asakkāraṁ …

     whatever lack of honor you’re affected by,

895. 895

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापिच्छतंpā·pic·cha·taṃ …

     uppannaṁ pāpicchataṁ …

     whatever bad desires you’re affected by,

896. 896

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापमित्ततंpā·pa·mit·ta·taṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरेय्य।vi·ha·rey·ya

     uppannaṁ pāpamittataṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya vihareyya.

     and whatever bad friendship you’re affected by.

897. 897

     तस्मातिह,tas·mā·ti·ha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ लाभंlā·bhaṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरिस्साम,vi·ha·ris·sā·ma उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अलाभंa·lā·bhaṃ …पे…pe

     Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, uppannaṁ lābhaṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharissāma, uppannaṁ alābhaṁ …pe…

     (Pāli only)

898. 898

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ यसंya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ yasaṁ …

     (Pāli only)

899. 899

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ अयसंa·ya·saṃ …

     uppannaṁ ayasaṁ …

     (Pāli only)

900. 900

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ सक्कारंsak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ sakkāraṁ …

     (Pāli only)

901. 901

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ असक्कारंa·sak·kā·raṃ …

     uppannaṁ asakkāraṁ …

     (Pāli only)

902. 902

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापिच्छतंpā·pic·cha·taṃ …

     uppannaṁ pāpicchataṁ …

     (Pāli only)

903. 903

     उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ पापमित्ततंpā·pa·mit·ta·taṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya विहरिस्सामाति;vi·ha·ris·sā·mā·ti

     uppannaṁ pāpamittataṁ abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharissāmāti;

     (Pāli only)

904. 904

     एवञ्हिe·vañ·hi वो,vo भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सिक्खितब्बन्ति।sik·khi·tab·ban·ti

     evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbanti.

     This is how you should train yourselves.

905. 905

     तीहि,tī·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve असद्धम्मेहिa·sad·dham·me·hi अभिभूतोa·bhi·bhū·to परियादिन्नचित्तोpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·to देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आपायिकोā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिकोne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठोkap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो।a·te·kic·cho

     Tīhi, bhikkhave, asaddhammehi abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto devadatto āpāyiko nerayiko kappaṭṭho atekiccho.

     And, monks, it’s because he’s overcome and consumed by three bad qualities that Devadatta is irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.

906. 906

     कतमेहिka·ta·me·hi तीहि?tī·hi

     Katamehi tīhi?

     What three?

907. 907

     पापिच्छता,pā·pic·cha·tā पापमित्तता,pā·pa·mit·ta·tā ओरमत्तकेनo·ra·mat·ta·ke·na विसेसाधिगमेनvi·se·sā·dhi·ga·me·na अन्तराan·ta·rā वोसानंvo·sā·naṃ आपादि—ā·pā·di

     Pāpicchatā, pāpamittatā, oramattakena visesādhigamena antarā vosānaṁ āpādi—

     Bad desires; bad friendship; and after trifling successes, he has stopped short of the goal.”

908. 908

     इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तीहिtī·hi असद्धम्मेहिa·sad·dham·me·hi अभिभूतोa·bhi·bhū·to परियादिन्नचित्तोpa·ri·yā·din·na·cit·to देवदत्तोde·va·dat·to आपायिकोā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिकोne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठोkap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छोति।a·te·kic·cho·ti

     imehi kho, bhikkhave, tīhi asaddhammehi abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto devadatto āpāyiko nerayiko kappaṭṭho atekicchoti.

     (Pāli only)

909. 909

     माmā जातुjā·tu कोचिko·ci लोकस्मिं,lo·kas·miṃ

     Mā jātu koci lokasmiṁ,

     “No one with bad desires

910. 910

     पापिच्छोpā·pic·cho उदपज्जथ;u·da·paj·ja·tha

     pāpiccho udapajjatha;

     Is ever reborn in this world.

911. 911

     तदमिनापिta·da·mi·nā·pi जानाथ,jā·nā·tha

     Tadamināpi jānātha,

     In this way you may know

912. 912

     पापिच्छानंpā·pic·chā·naṃ यथागति।ya·thā·ga·ti

     pāpicchānaṁ yathāgati.

     The destination of those with bad desires.

913. 913

     पण्डितोतिpaṇ·ḍi·to·ti समञ्ञातो,sa·mañ·ñā·to

     Paṇḍitoti samaññāto,

     Designated as “wise”,

914. 914

     भावितत्तोतिbhā·vi·tat·to·ti सम्मतो;sam·ma·to

     bhāvitattoti sammato;

     Agreed upon as “highly developed”,

915. 915

     जलंवja·laṃ·va यससाya·sa·sā अट्ठा,aṭ·ṭhā

     Jalaṁva yasasā aṭṭhā,

     It was as if he was shining with fame—

916. 916

     देवदत्तोतिde·va·dat·to·ti मेme सुतं।su·taṃ

     devadattoti me sutaṁ.

     I have heard Devadatta was like this.

917. 917

     सोso पमादंpa·mā·daṃ अनुचिण्णो,a·nu·ciṇ·ṇo

     So pamādaṁ anuciṇṇo,

     He was heedless,

918. 918

     आसज्जā·saj·ja नंnaṃ तथागतं;ta·thā·ga·taṃ

     āsajja naṁ tathāgataṁ;

     And after hurting the Buddha,

919. 919

     अवीचिनिरयंa·vī·ci·ni·ra·yaṃ पत्तो,pat·to

     Avīcinirayaṁ patto,

     He’s gone to the Avīci hell,

920. 920

     चतुद्वारंca·tud·vā·raṃ भयानकं।bha·yā·na·kaṃ

     catudvāraṁ bhayānakaṁ.

     Frightful and with four doors.

921. 921

     अदुट्ठस्सa·duṭ·ṭhas·sa हिhi योyo दुब्भे,dub·bhe

     Aduṭṭhassa hi yo dubbhe,

     If you hurt one free from anger,

922. 922

     पापकम्मंpā·pa·kam·maṃ अक्रुब्बतो;ak·rub·ba·to

     pāpakammaṁ akrubbato;

     One who doesn’t do anything bad,

923. 923

     तमेवta·me·va पापंpā·paṃ फुसति,phu·sa·ti

     Tameva pāpaṁ phusati,

     You experience that evil yourself,

924. 924

     दुट्ठचित्तंduṭ·ṭha·cit·taṃ अनादरं।a·nā·da·raṃ

     duṭṭhacittaṁ anādaraṁ.

     Having a malicious mind and being disrespectful.

925. 925

     समुद्दंsa·mud·daṃ विसकुम्भेन,vi·sa·kum·bhe·na

     Samuddaṁ visakumbhena,

     You might think to pollute

926. 926

     योyo मञ्ञेय्यmañ·ñey·ya पदूसितुं;pa·dū·si·tuṃ

     yo maññeyya padūsituṁ;

     The ocean with a pot of poison,

927. 927

     नna सोso तेनte·na पदूसेय्य,pa·dū·sey·ya

     Na so tena padūseyya,

     But you would not be able to do so,

928. 928

     भेस्माbhes·mā हिhi उदधीu·da·dhī महा।ma·hā

     bhesmā hi udadhī mahā.

     For the ocean is frightfully large.

929. 929

     एवमेवe·va·me·va तथागतं,ta·thā·ga·taṃ

     Evameva tathāgataṁ,

     It’s the same with the Buddha:

930. 930

     योyo वादेनुपहिंसति;vā·de·nu·pa·hiṃ·sa·ti

     yo vādenupahiṁsati;

     If by speech one tries to harm him—

931. 931

     समग्गतंsa·mag·ga·taṃ सन्तचित्तं,san·ta·cit·taṃ

     Samaggataṁ santacittaṁ,

     He with right conduct and a peaceful mind—

932. 932

     वादोvā·do तम्हिtam·hi नna रूहति।rū·ha·ti

     vādo tamhi na rūhati.

     That speech doesn’t affect him.

933. 933

     तादिसंtā·di·saṃ मित्तंmit·taṃ क्रुब्बेथ,krub·be·tha

     Tādisaṁ mittaṁ krubbetha,

     The wise make friends with such a person,

934. 934

     तञ्चtañ·ca सेवेथse·ve·tha पण्डितो;paṇ·ḍi·to

     tañca sevetha paṇḍito;

     And they associate with him.

935. 935

     यस्सyas·sa मग्गानुगोmag·gā·nu·go भिक्खु,bhik·khu

     Yassa maggānugo bhikkhu,

     The monk who follows his path,

936. 936

     खयंkha·yaṃ दुक्खस्सduk·khas·sa पापुणे”ति।pā·pu·ṇe

     khayaṁ dukkhassa pāpuṇe”ti.

     Achieves the end of suffering.”

937. 937

     3।2। उपालिपञ्हाu·pā·li·pañ·hā

     3.2. Upālipañhā

     11. Upāli’s questions

938. 938

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā उपालिu·pā·li येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho āyasmā upāli yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     On one occasion Upāli went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

939. 939

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā उपालिu·pā·li भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā upāli bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and said,

940. 940

     “सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji सङ्घराजीति,saṅ·gha·rā·jī·ti भन्ते,bhan·te वुच्चति।vuc·ca·ti

     “saṅgharāji saṅgharājīti, bhante, vuccati.

     “Sir, we speak of ‘fracture in the Sangha’.

941. 941

     कित्तावताkit·tā·va·tā नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji होति,ho·ti नोno चca सङ्घभेदो?saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, saṅgharāji hoti, no ca saṅghabhedo?

     But how is there a fracture in the Sangha, yet not a schism in the Sangha?

942. 942

     कित्तावताkit·tā·va·tā चca पनpa·na सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji चेवce·va होतिho·ti सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do चा”ति?cā

     Kittāvatā ca pana saṅgharāji ceva hoti saṅghabhedo cā”ti?

     And how is there both a fracture and a schism in the Sangha?”

943. 943

     “एकतो,e·ka·to उपालि,u·pā·li एकोe·ko होति,ho·ti एकतोe·ka·to द्वे,dve चतुत्थोca·tut·tho अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

     “Ekato, upāli, eko hoti, ekato dve, catuttho anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

     “If, Upāli, there is one monk on one side and two on the other, and a fourth makes the proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

944. 944

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

     ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

     ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this,’

945. 945

     एवम्पिe·vam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji होति,ho·ti नोno चca सङ्घभेदो।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Evampi kho, upāli, saṅgharāji hoti, no ca saṅghabhedo.

     then this is a fracture in the Sangha, but not a schism in the Sangha.

946. 946

     एकतो,e·ka·to उपालि,u·pā·li द्वेdve होन्ति,hon·ti एकतोe·ka·to द्वे,dve पञ्चमोpañ·ca·mo अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

     Ekato, upāli, dve honti, ekato dve, pañcamo anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

     If there are two monks on one side and two on the other, and a fifth makes the proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

947. 947

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

     ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

     ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this,’

948. 948

     एवम्पिe·vam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji होति,ho·ti नोno चca सङ्घभेदो।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Evampi kho, upāli, saṅgharāji hoti, no ca saṅghabhedo.

     then this is a fracture in the Sangha, but not a schism in the Sangha.

949. 949

     एकतो,e·ka·to उपालि,u·pā·li द्वेdve होन्ति,hon·ti एकतोe·ka·to तयो,ta·yo छट्ठोchaṭ·ṭho अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

     Ekato, upāli, dve honti, ekato tayo, chaṭṭho anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

     If there are two monks on one side and three on the other, and a sixth makes the proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

950. 950

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

     ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

     ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this,’

951. 951

     एवम्पिe·vam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji होति,ho·ti नोno चca सङ्घभेदो।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Evampi kho, upāli, saṅgharāji hoti, no ca saṅghabhedo.

     then this is a fracture in the Sangha, but not a schism in the Sangha.

952. 952

     एकतो,e·ka·to उपालि,u·pā·li तयोta·yo होन्ति,hon·ti एकतोe·ka·to तयो,ta·yo सत्तमोsat·ta·mo अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

     Ekato, upāli, tayo honti, ekato tayo, sattamo anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

     If there are three monks on one side and three on the other, and a seventh makes the proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

953. 953

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

     ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

     ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this,’

954. 954

     एवम्पिe·vam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji होति,ho·ti नोno चca सङ्घभेदो।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Evampi kho, upāli, saṅgharāji hoti, no ca saṅghabhedo.

     then this is a fracture in the Sangha, but not a schism in the Sangha.

955. 955

     एकतो,e·ka·to उपालि,u·pā·li तयोta·yo होन्ति,hon·ti एकतोe·ka·to चत्तारो,cat·tā·ro अट्ठमोaṭ·ṭha·mo अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

     Ekato, upāli, tayo honti, ekato cattāro, aṭṭhamo anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

     If there are three monks on one side and four on the other, and an eighth makes the proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

956. 956

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

     ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

     ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this,’

957. 957

     एवम्पिe·vam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji होति,ho·ti नोno चca सङ्घभेदो।saṅ·gha·bhe·do

     Evampi kho, upāli, saṅgharāji hoti, no ca saṅghabhedo.

     then this is a fracture in the Sangha, but not a schism in the Sangha.

958. 958

     एकतो,e·ka·to उपालि,u·pā·li चत्तारोcat·tā·ro होन्ति,hon·ti एकतोe·ka·to चत्तारो,cat·tā·ro नवमोna·va·mo अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

     Ekato, upāli, cattāro honti, ekato cattāro, navamo anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

     But if there are four monks on one side and four on the other, and a ninth makes the proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

959. 959

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

     ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

     ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this,’

960. 960

     एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji चेवce·va होतिho·ti सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do च।ca

     Evaṁ kho, upāli, saṅgharāji ceva hoti saṅghabhedo ca.

     then this is both a fracture in the Sangha and also a schism in the Sangha.

961. 961

     नवन्नंna·van·naṃ वा,vā उपालि,u·pā·li अतिरेकनवन्नंa·ti·re·ka·na·van·naṃ वाvā सङ्घराजिsaṅ·gha·rā·ji चेवce·va होतिho·ti सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do च।ca

     Navannaṁ vā, upāli, atirekanavannaṁ vā saṅgharāji ceva hoti saṅghabhedo ca.

     If there are nine or more monks, then this is both a fracture in the Sangha and also a schism in the Sangha.

962. 962

     नna खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दति,bhin·da·ti अपिa·pi चca भेदायbhe·dā·ya परक्कमति,pa·rak·ka·ma·ti नna सिक्खमानाsik·kha·mā·nā सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दतिbhin·da·ti …पे…pe

     Na kho, upāli, bhikkhunī saṅghaṁ bhindati, api ca bhedāya parakkamati, na sikkhamānā saṅghaṁ bhindati …pe…

     A nun cannot cause a schism in the Sangha, even if she makes an effort to do so. A trainee nun,

963. 963

     नna सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दति,bhin·da·ti नna सामणेरीsā·ma·ṇe·rī सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दति,bhin·da·ti नna उपासकोu·pā·sa·ko सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दति,bhin·da·ti नna उपासिकाu·pā·si·kā सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दति,bhin·da·ti अपिa·pi चca भेदायbhe·dā·ya परक्कमति।pa·rak·ka·ma·ti

     na sāmaṇero saṅghaṁ bhindati, na sāmaṇerī saṅghaṁ bhindati, na upāsako saṅghaṁ bhindati, na upāsikā saṅghaṁ bhindati, api ca bhedāya parakkamati.

     a novice monk, a novice nun, a male lay follower, or a female lay follower cannot cause a schism in the Sangha, even if she makes an effort to do so.

964. 964

     भिक्खुbhik·khu खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li पकतत्तो,pa·ka·tat·to समानसंवासको,sa·mā·na·saṃ·vā·sa·ko समानसीमायंsa·mā·na·sī·mā·yaṃ ठितो,ṭhi·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दती”ति।bhin·da·tī

     Bhikkhu kho, upāli, pakatatto, samānasaṁvāsako, samānasīmāyaṁ ṭhito, saṅghaṁ bhindatī”ti.

     Only a monk of regular standing, one who belongs to the same Buddhist sect and is present within the same monastery zone, can cause a schism in the Sangha.”

965. 965

     “सङ्घभेदोsaṅ·gha·bhe·do सङ्घभेदोति,saṅ·gha·bhe·do·ti भन्ते,bhan·te वुच्चति।vuc·ca·ti

     “Saṅghabhedo saṅghabhedoti, bhante, vuccati.

     “Sir, we speak of ‘schism in the Sangha’.

966. 966

     कित्तावताkit·tā·va·tā नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिन्नोbhin·no होती”ति?ho·tī

     Kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, saṅgho bhinno hotī”ti?

     But how is there a schism in the Sangha?”

967. 967

     “इधुपालि,i·dhu·pā·li भिक्खूbhik·khū अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     “Idhupāli, bhikkhū adhammaṁ dhammoti dīpenti.

     “Take the case when monks proclaim what’s contrary to the Teaching as being in accordance with it.

968. 968

     धम्मंdham·maṃ अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Dhammaṁ adhammoti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what’s in accordance with the Teaching as contrary to it.

969. 969

     अविनयंa·vi·na·yaṃ विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Avinayaṁ vinayoti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what’s contrary to the Monastic Law as being in accordance with it.

970. 970

     विनयंvi·na·yaṃ अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Vinayaṁ avinayoti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what’s in accordance with the Monastic Law as contrary to it.

971. 971

     अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatena bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what hasn’t been spoken by the Buddha as spoken by him.

972. 972

     भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatena abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what’s been spoken by the Buddha as not spoken by him.

973. 973

     अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what wasn’t practiced by the Buddha as practiced by him.

974. 974

     आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what was practiced by the Buddha as not practiced by him.

975. 975

     अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Apaññattaṁ tathāgatena paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what wasn’t laid down by the Buddha as laid down by him.

976. 976

     पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Paññattaṁ tathāgatena apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what was laid down by the Buddha as not laid down by him.

977. 977

     अनापत्तिंa·nā·pat·tiṃ आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Anāpattiṁ āpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim a non-offense as an offense.

978. 978

     आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Āpattiṁ anāpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim an offense as a non-offense.

979. 979

     लहुकंla·hu·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Lahukaṁ āpattiṁ garukā āpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim a light offense as heavy.

980. 980

     गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Garukaṁ āpattiṁ lahukā āpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim a heavy offense as light.

981. 981

     सावसेसंsā·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Sāvasesaṁ āpattiṁ anavasesā āpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim a curable offense as incurable.

982. 982

     अनवसेसंa·na·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Anavasesaṁ āpattiṁ sāvasesā āpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim an incurable offense as curable.

983. 983

     दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Duṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ aduṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim a grave offense as minor.

984. 984

     अदुट्ठुल्लंa·duṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Aduṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ duṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim a minor offense as grave.

985. 985

     तेte इमेहिi·me·hi अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi अपकस्सन्ति,a·pa·kas·san·ti अवपकस्सन्ति,a·va·pa·kas·san·ti आवेनिंā·ve·niṃ उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करोन्ति,ka·ron·ti आवेनिंā·ve·niṃ पवारणंpa·vā·ra·ṇaṃ करोन्ति,ka·ron·ti आवेनिंā·ve·niṃ सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करोन्ति।ka·ron·ti

     Te imehi aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi apakassanti, avapakassanti, āveniṁ uposathaṁ karonti, āveniṁ pavāraṇaṁ karonti, āveniṁ saṅghakammaṁ karonti.

     If, based on any of these eighteen grounds, they pull away and separate, and they do the observance-day ceremony, the invitation ceremony, or legal procedures of the Sangha separately, then there is a schism in the Sangha.”

986. 986

     एत्तावताet·tā·va·tā खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिन्नोbhin·no होती”ति।ho·tī

     Ettāvatā kho, upāli, saṅgho bhinno hotī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

987. 987

     “सङ्घसामग्गीsaṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī सङ्घसामग्गीति,saṅ·gha·sā·mag·gī·ti भन्ते,bhan·te वुच्चति।vuc·ca·ti

     “Saṅghasāmaggī saṅghasāmaggīti, bhante, vuccati.

     “Sir, we speak of ‘unity in the Sangha’.

988. 988

     कित्तावताkit·tā·va·tā नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घोsaṅ·gho समग्गोsa·mag·go होती”ति?ho·tī

     Kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, saṅgho samaggo hotī”ti?

     But how is there unity in the Sangha?”

989. 989

     “इधुपालि,i·dhu·pā·li भिक्खूbhik·khū अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     “Idhupāli, bhikkhū adhammaṁ adhammoti dīpenti.

     “Take the case when monks proclaim what’s contrary to the Teaching as such.

990. 990

     धम्मंdham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Dhammaṁ dhammoti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what’s in accordance with the Teaching as such.

991. 991

     अविनयंa·vi·na·yaṃ अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Avinayaṁ avinayoti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what’s contrary to the Monastic Law as such.

992. 992

     विनयंvi·na·yaṃ विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Vinayaṁ vinayoti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what’s in accordance with the Monastic Law as such.

993. 993

     अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatena abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what hasn’t been spoken by the Buddha as such.

994. 994

     भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatena bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what’s been spoken by the Buddha as such.

995. 995

     अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what wasn’t practiced by the Buddha as such.

996. 996

     आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what was practiced by the Buddha as such.

997. 997

     अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Apaññattaṁ tathāgatena apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what wasn’t laid down by the Buddha as such.

998. 998

     पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Paññattaṁ tathāgatena paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpenti.

     They proclaim what was laid down by the Buddha as such.

999. 999

     अनापत्तिंa·nā·pat·tiṃ अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

     Anāpattiṁ anāpattīti dīpenti.

     They proclaim a non-offense as such.

1000. 1000

      आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

      Āpattiṁ āpattīti dīpenti.

      They proclaim an offense as such.

1001. 1001

      लहुकंla·hu·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

      Lahukaṁ āpattiṁ lahukā āpattīti dīpenti.

      They proclaim a light offense as light.

1002. 1002

      गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

      Garukaṁ āpattiṁ garukā āpattīti dīpenti.

      They proclaim a heavy offense as heavy.

1003. 1003

      सावसेसंsā·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

      Sāvasesaṁ āpattiṁ sāvasesā āpattīti dīpenti.

      They proclaim a curable offense as curable.

1004. 1004

      अनवसेसंa·na·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

      Anavasesaṁ āpattiṁ anavasesā āpattīti dīpenti.

      They proclaim an incurable offense as incurable.

1005. 1005

      दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

      Duṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ duṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpenti.

      They proclaim a grave offense as grave.

1006. 1006

      अदुट्ठुल्लंa·duṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेन्ति।dī·pen·ti

      Aduṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ aduṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpenti.

      They proclaim a minor offense as minor.

1007. 1007

      तेte इमेहिi·me·hi अट्ठारसहिaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·hi वत्थूहिvat·thū·hi नna अपकस्सन्ति,a·pa·kas·san·ti नna अवपकस्सन्ति,a·va·pa·kas·san·ti नna आवेनिंā·ve·niṃ उपोसथंu·po·sa·thaṃ करोन्ति,ka·ron·ti नna आवेनिंā·ve·niṃ पवारणंpa·vā·ra·ṇaṃ करोन्ति,ka·ron·ti नna आवेनिंā·ve·niṃ सङ्घकम्मंsaṅ·gha·kam·maṃ करोन्ति।ka·ron·ti

      Te imehi aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi na apakassanti, na avapakassanti, na āveniṁ uposathaṁ karonti, na āveniṁ pavāraṇaṁ karonti, na āveniṁ saṅghakammaṁ karonti.

      If, based on any of these eighteen grounds, they don’t pull away or separate, and they don’t do the observance-day ceremony, the invitation ceremony, or legal procedures of the Sangha separately,

1008. 1008

      एत्तावताet·tā·va·tā खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घोsaṅ·gho समग्गोsa·mag·go होती”ति।ho·tī

      Ettāvatā kho, upāli, saṅgho samaggo hotī”ti.

      then there is unity in the Sangha.”

1009. 1009

      “समग्गंsa·mag·gaṃ पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दित्वाbhin·dit·vā किंkiṃ सोso पसवती”ति?pa·sa·va·tī

      “Samaggaṁ pana, bhante, saṅghaṁ bhinditvā kiṁ so pasavatī”ti?

      “But, sir, what’s the consequence of causing a schism in a united Sangha?”

1010. 1010

      “समग्गंsa·mag·gaṃ खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ भिन्दित्वाbhin·dit·vā कप्पट्ठिकंkap·paṭ·ṭhi·kaṃ किब्बिसंkib·bi·saṃ पसवति,pa·sa·va·ti कप्पंkap·paṃ निरयम्हिni·ra·yam·hi पच्चतीति।pac·ca·tī·ti

      “Samaggaṁ kho, upāli, saṅghaṁ bhinditvā kappaṭṭhikaṁ kibbisaṁ pasavati, kappaṁ nirayamhi paccatīti.

      “Anyone who causes a schism in a united Sangha does an evil act with effect for an eon. He’s boiled in hell for an eon.”

1011. 1011

      आपायिकोā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko

      Āpāyiko nerayiko,

      “Going downwards, bound for hell—

1012. 1012

      कप्पट्ठोkap·paṭ·ṭho सङ्घभेदको;saṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko

      Kappaṭṭho saṅghabhedako;

      The schismatic stays there for an eon.

1013. 1013

      वग्गरतोvag·ga·ra·to अधम्मट्ठो,a·dham·maṭ·ṭho

      Vaggarato adhammaṭṭho,

      Delighting in division and immoral,

1014. 1014

      योगक्खेमाyo·gak·khe·mā पधंसति;pa·dhaṃ·sa·ti

      Yogakkhemā padhaṁsati;

      Barred from sanctuary,

1015. 1015

      सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ समग्गंsa·mag·gaṃ भिन्दित्वा,bhin·dit·vā

      Saṅghaṁ samaggaṁ bhinditvā,

      Having divided a united Sangha,

1016. 1016

      कप्पंkap·paṃ निरयम्हिni·ra·yam·hi पच्चती”ति।pac·ca·tī

      Kappaṁ nirayamhi paccatī”ti.

      He boils in hell for an eon.”

1017. 1017

      “भिन्नंbhin·naṃ पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ समग्गंsa·mag·gaṃ कत्वाkat·vā किंkiṃ सोso पसवती”ति?pa·sa·va·tī

      “Bhinnaṁ pana, bhante, saṅghaṁ samaggaṁ katvā kiṁ so pasavatī”ti?

      “But, sir, what’s the consequence of uniting a schismatic sangha?”

1018. 1018

      “भिन्नंbhin·naṃ खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ समग्गंsa·mag·gaṃ कत्वाkat·vā ब्रह्मंbrah·maṃ पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ पसवति,pa·sa·va·ti कप्पंkap·paṃ सग्गम्हिsag·gam·hi मोदतीति।mo·da·tī·ti

      “Bhinnaṁ kho, upāli, saṅghaṁ samaggaṁ katvā brahmaṁ puññaṁ pasavati, kappaṁ saggamhi modatīti.

      “Anyone who unites a schismatic sangha generates supreme merit. He rejoices in heaven for an eon.”

1019. 1019

      सुखाsu·khā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa सामग्गी,sā·mag·gī

      Sukhā saṅghassa sāmaggī,

      “Pleasant is unity in the Sangha,

1020. 1020

      समग्गानञ्चsa·mag·gā·nañ·ca अनुग्गहो;a·nug·ga·ho

      samaggānañca anuggaho;

      And to help the fostering of harmony.

1021. 1021

      समग्गरतोsa·mag·ga·ra·to धम्मट्ठो,dham·maṭ·ṭho

      Samaggarato dhammaṭṭho,

      Delighting in unity and moral,

1022. 1022

      योगक्खेमाyo·gak·khe·mā नna धंसति;dhaṃ·sa·ti

      yogakkhemā na dhaṁsati;

      Not barred from sanctuary,

1023. 1023

      सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ समग्गंsa·mag·gaṃ कत्वान,kat·vā·na

      Saṅghaṁ samaggaṁ katvāna,

      Having united the Sangha,

1024. 1024

      कप्पंkap·paṃ सग्गम्हिsag·gam·hi मोदती”ति।mo·da·tī

      kappaṁ saggamhi modatī”ti.

      He rejoices in heaven for an eon.”

1025. 1025

      “सियाsi·yā नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो”ति?a·te·kic·cho

      “Siyā nu kho, bhante, saṅghabhedako āpāyiko, nerayiko, kappaṭṭho, atekiccho”ti?

      “Might one who causes a schism in the Sangha be irredeemably destined to an eon in hell?”

1026. 1026

      “सिया,si·yā उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो”ति।a·te·kic·cho

      “Siyā, upāli, saṅghabhedako āpāyiko, nerayiko, kappaṭṭho, atekiccho”ti.

      “He might.”

1027. 1027

      “सियाsi·yā पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko नna आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नna नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko नna कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho नna अतेकिच्छो”ति?a·te·kic·cho

      “Siyā pana, bhante, saṅghabhedako na āpāyiko, na nerayiko, na kappaṭṭho, na atekiccho”ti?

      “Might one who causes a schism in the Sangha not be irredeemably destined to an eon in hell?”

1028. 1028

      “सिया,si·yā उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko नna आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नna नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko नna कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho नna अतेकिच्छो”ति।a·te·kic·cho

      “Siyā, upāli, saṅghabhedako na āpāyiko, na nerayiko, na kappaṭṭho, na atekiccho”ti.

      “He might.”

1029. 1029

      Schismatics destined to hell

1030. 1030

      “कतमोka·ta·mo पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो”ति?a·te·kic·cho

      “Katamo pana, bhante, saṅghabhedako āpāyiko, nerayiko, kappaṭṭho, atekiccho”ti?

      “What sort of person who causes a schism in the Sangha is irredeemably destined to an eon in hell?”

1031. 1031

      “इधुपालि,i·dhu·pā·li भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति।dī·pe·ti

      “Idhupāli, bhikkhu adhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti.

      “In this case a monk proclaims what’s contrary to the Teaching as being in accordance with it.

1032. 1032

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधम्मदिट्ठि,a·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de अधम्मदिट्ठि,a·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya दिट्ठिं,diṭ·ṭhiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya खन्तिं,khan·tiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya रुचिं,ru·ciṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya भावं,bhā·vaṃ अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

      Tasmiṁ adhammadiṭṭhi, bhede adhammadiṭṭhi, vinidhāya diṭṭhiṁ, vinidhāya khantiṁ, vinidhāya ruciṁ, vinidhāya bhāvaṁ, anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

      He has the view that what he says is illegitimate and the view that the schism is illegitimate. He misrepresents his view of what’s true, his belief of what’s true, his acceptance of what’s true, or his sentiment of what’s true. He makes a proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

1033. 1033

      ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

      ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

      ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this.’

1034. 1034

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो।a·te·kic·cho

      Ayampi kho, upāli, saṅghabhedako āpāyiko, nerayiko, kappaṭṭho, atekiccho.

      When such a person causes a schism in the Sangha, he’s irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.

1035. 1035

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ उपालि,u·pā·li भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति।dī·pe·ti

      Puna caparaṁ, upāli, bhikkhu adhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti.

      Again, a monk proclaims what’s contrary to the Teaching as being in accordance with it.

1036. 1036

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधम्मदिट्ठि,a·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya दिट्ठिं,diṭ·ṭhiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya खन्तिं,khan·tiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya रुचिं,ru·ciṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya भावं,bhā·vaṃ अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

      Tasmiṁ adhammadiṭṭhi, bhede dhammadiṭṭhi, vinidhāya diṭṭhiṁ, vinidhāya khantiṁ, vinidhāya ruciṁ, vinidhāya bhāvaṁ, anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

      He has the view that what he says is illegitimate, but the view that the schism is legitimate. He misrepresents his view of what’s true, his belief of what’s true, his acceptance of what’s true, or his sentiment of what’s true. He makes a proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

1037. 1037

      ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

      ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

      ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this.’

1038. 1038

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो।a·te·kic·cho

      Ayampi kho, upāli, saṅghabhedako āpāyiko, nerayiko, kappaṭṭho, atekiccho.

      When such a person causes a schism in the Sangha, he too is irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.

1039. 1039

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ उपालि,u·pā·li भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति।dī·pe·ti

      Puna caparaṁ, upāli, bhikkhu adhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti.

      Again, a monk proclaims what’s contrary to the Teaching as being in accordance with it.

1040. 1040

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधम्मदिट्ठि,a·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de वेमतिको,ve·ma·ti·ko विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya दिट्ठिं,diṭ·ṭhiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya खन्तिं,khan·tiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya रुचिं,ru·ciṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya भावं,bhā·vaṃ अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

      Tasmiṁ adhammadiṭṭhi, bhede vematiko, vinidhāya diṭṭhiṁ, vinidhāya khantiṁ, vinidhāya ruciṁ, vinidhāya bhāvaṁ, anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

      He has the view that what he says is illegitimate, but is unsure about the schism. He misrepresents his view of what’s true, his belief of what’s true, his acceptance of what’s true, or his sentiment of what’s true. He makes a proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

1041. 1041

      ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

      ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

      ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this.’

1042. 1042

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो।a·te·kic·cho

      Ayampi kho, upāli, saṅghabhedako āpāyiko, nerayiko, kappaṭṭho, atekiccho.

      When such a person causes a schism in the Sangha, he too is irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.

1043. 1043

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ उपालि,u·pā·li भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति।dī·pe·ti

      Puna caparaṁ, upāli, bhikkhu adhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti.

      Again, a monk proclaims what’s contrary to the Teaching as being in accordance with it.

1044. 1044

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de अधम्मदिट्ठिa·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi …पे…pe

      Tasmiṁ dhammadiṭṭhi, bhede adhammadiṭṭhi …pe…

      He has the view that what he says is legitimate, but the view that the schism is illegitimate …

1045. 1045

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मदिट्ठिdham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de धम्मदिट्ठि।dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi

      tasmiṁ dhammadiṭṭhi bhede dhammadiṭṭhi.

      (Pāli only)

1046. 1046

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मदिट्ठिdham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de वेमतिको।ve·ma·ti·ko

      Tasmiṁ dhammadiṭṭhi bhede vematiko.

      He has the view that what he says is legitimate, but is unsure about the schism …

1047. 1047

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ वेमतिकोve·ma·ti·ko भेदेbhe·de अधम्मदिट्ठि।a·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi

      Tasmiṁ vematiko bhede adhammadiṭṭhi.

      He is unsure about what he says, but has the view that the schism is illegitimate …

1048. 1048

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ वेमतिकोve·ma·ti·ko भेदेbhe·de धम्मदिट्ठि।dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi

      Tasmiṁ vematiko bhede dhammadiṭṭhi.

      He is unsure about what he says, but has the view that the schism is legitimate …

1049. 1049

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ वेमतिकोve·ma·ti·ko भेदेbhe·de वेमतिकोve·ma·ti·ko विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya दिट्ठिं,diṭ·ṭhiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya खन्तिं,khan·tiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya रुचिं,ru·ciṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya भावं,bhā·vaṃ अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

      Tasmiṁ vematiko bhede vematiko vinidhāya diṭṭhiṁ, vinidhāya khantiṁ, vinidhāya ruciṁ, vinidhāya bhāvaṁ, anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

      He is unsure about what he says and is unsure about the schism. He misrepresents his view of what’s true, his belief of what’s true, his acceptance of what’s true, or his sentiment of what’s true. He makes a proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

1050. 1050

      ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

      ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

      ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this.’

1051. 1051

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो।a·te·kic·cho

      Ayampi kho, upāli, saṅghabhedako āpāyiko, nerayiko, kappaṭṭho, atekiccho.

      When such a person causes a schism in the Sangha, he too is irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.

1052. 1052

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ उपालि,u·pā·li भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मंdham·maṃ अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …पे…pe

      Puna caparaṁ, upāli, bhikkhu dhammaṁ adhammoti dīpeti …pe…

      Again, a monk proclaims what’s in accordance with the Teaching as contrary to it,

1053. 1053

      अविनयंa·vi·na·yaṃ विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      avinayaṁ vinayoti dīpeti …

      what’s contrary to the Monastic Law as being in accordance with it,

1054. 1054

      विनयंvi·na·yaṃ अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      vinayaṁ avinayoti dīpeti …

      what’s in accordance with the Monastic Law as contrary to it,

1055. 1055

      अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatena bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti …

      what hasn’t been spoken by the Buddha as spoken by him,

1056. 1056

      भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatena abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti …

      what’s been spoken by the Buddha as not spoken by him,

1057. 1057

      अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti …

      what wasn’t practiced by the Buddha as practiced by him,

1058. 1058

      आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatena anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti …

      what was practiced by the Buddha as not practiced by him,

1059. 1059

      अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      apaññattaṁ tathāgatena paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti …

      what wasn’t laid down by the Buddha as laid down by him,

1060. 1060

      पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनta·thā·ga·te·na अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      paññattaṁ tathāgatena apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti dīpeti …

      what was laid down by the Buddha as not laid down by him,

1061. 1061

      अनापत्तिंa·nā·pat·tiṃ आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      anāpattiṁ āpattīti dīpeti …

      a non-offense as an offense,

1062. 1062

      आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      āpattiṁ anāpattīti dīpeti …

      an offense as a non-offense,

1063. 1063

      लहुकंla·hu·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      lahukaṁ āpattiṁ garukā āpattīti dīpeti …

      a light offense as heavy,

1064. 1064

      गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      garukaṁ āpattiṁ lahukā āpattīti dīpeti …

      a heavy offense as light,

1065. 1065

      सावसेसंsā·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      sāvasesaṁ āpattiṁ anavasesā āpattīti dīpeti …

      a curable offense as incurable,

1066. 1066

      अनवसेसंa·na·va·se·saṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      anavasesaṁ āpattiṁ sāvasesā āpattīti dīpeti …

      an incurable offense as curable,

1067. 1067

      दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      duṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ aduṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti …

      a grave offense as minor,

1068. 1068

      अदुट्ठुल्लंa·duṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …

      aduṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ duṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti …

      or a minor offense as grave.

1069. 1069

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधम्मदिट्ठि,a·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de अधम्मदिट्ठिa·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi …पे…pe

      tasmiṁ adhammadiṭṭhi, bhede adhammadiṭṭhi …pe…

      He has the view that what he says is illegitimate and the view that the schism is illegitimate. …

1070. 1070

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधम्मदिट्ठि,a·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de धम्मदिट्ठिdham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi …

      tasmiṁ adhammadiṭṭhi, bhede dhammadiṭṭhi …

      He has the view that what he says is illegitimate, but the view that the schism is legitimate. …

1071. 1071

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधम्मदिट्ठि,a·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de वेमतिकोve·ma·ti·ko …

      tasmiṁ adhammadiṭṭhi, bhede vematiko …

      He has the view that what he says is illegitimate, but is unsure about the schism. …

1072. 1072

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de अधम्मदिट्ठिa·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi …

      tasmiṁ dhammadiṭṭhi, bhede adhammadiṭṭhi …

      He has the view that what he says is legitimate, but the view that the schism is illegitimate. …

1073. 1073

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de धम्मदिट्ठिdham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi …

      tasmiṁ dhammadiṭṭhi, bhede dhammadiṭṭhi …

      (Pāli only)

1074. 1074

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de वेमतिकोve·ma·ti·ko …

      tasmiṁ dhammadiṭṭhi, bhede vematiko …

      He has the view that what he says is legitimate, but is unsure about the schism. …

1075. 1075

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ वेमतिको,ve·ma·ti·ko भेदेbhe·de अधम्मदिट्ठिa·dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi …

      tasmiṁ vematiko, bhede adhammadiṭṭhi …

      He is unsure about what he says, but has the view that the schism is illegitimate. …

1076. 1076

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ वेमतिको,ve·ma·ti·ko भेदेbhe·de धम्मदिट्ठिdham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi …

      tasmiṁ vematiko, bhede dhammadiṭṭhi …

      He is unsure about what he says, but has the view that the schism is legitimate. …

1077. 1077

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ वेमतिको,ve·ma·ti·ko भेदेbhe·de वेमतिको,ve·ma·ti·ko विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya दिट्ठिं,diṭ·ṭhiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya खन्तिं,khan·tiṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya रुचिं,ru·ciṃ विनिधायvi·ni·dhā·ya भावं,bhā·vaṃ अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

      tasmiṁ vematiko, bhede vematiko, vinidhāya diṭṭhiṁ, vinidhāya khantiṁ, vinidhāya ruciṁ, vinidhāya bhāvaṁ, anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

      He is unsure about what he says and unsure about the schism. He misrepresents his view of what’s true, his belief of what’s true, his acceptance of what’s true, or his sentiment of what’s true. He makes a proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

1078. 1078

      ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

      ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

      ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this.’

1079. 1079

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho अतेकिच्छो”ति।a·te·kic·cho

      Ayampi kho, upāli, saṅghabhedako āpāyiko, nerayiko, kappaṭṭho, atekiccho”ti.

      When such a person causes a schism in the Sangha, he too is irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.”

1080. 1080

      Schismatics not destined to hell

1081. 1081

      “कतमोka·ta·mo पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko नna आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नna नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko नna कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho नna अतेकिच्छो”ति?a·te·kic·cho

      “Katamo pana, bhante, saṅghabhedako na āpāyiko, na nerayiko, na kappaṭṭho, na atekiccho”ti?

      “What sort of person who causes a schism in the Sangha isn’t irredeemably destined to an eon in hell?”

1082. 1082

      “इधुपालि,i·dhu·pā·li भिक्खुbhik·khu अधम्मंa·dham·maṃ धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti दीपेति।dī·pe·ti

      “Idhupāli, bhikkhu adhammaṁ dhammoti dīpeti.

      “In this case a monk proclaims what’s contrary to the Teaching as being in accordance with it.

1083. 1083

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi अविनिधायa·vi·ni·dhā·ya दिट्ठिं,diṭ·ṭhiṃ अविनिधायa·vi·ni·dhā·ya खन्तिं,khan·tiṃ अविनिधायa·vi·ni·dhā·ya रुचिं,ru·ciṃ अविनिधायa·vi·ni·dhā·ya भावं,bhā·vaṃ अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

      Tasmiṁ dhammadiṭṭhi, bhede dhammadiṭṭhi, avinidhāya diṭṭhiṁ, avinidhāya khantiṁ, avinidhāya ruciṁ, avinidhāya bhāvaṁ, anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

      He has the view that what he says is legitimate and the view that the schism is legitimate. He doesn’t misrepresent his view of what’s true, his belief of what’s true, his acceptance of what’s true, or his sentiment of what’s true. He makes a proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

1084. 1084

      ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

      ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

      ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this.’

1085. 1085

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko नna आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नna नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko नna कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho नna अतेकिच्छो।a·te·kic·cho

      Ayampi kho, upāli, saṅghabhedako na āpāyiko, na nerayiko, na kappaṭṭho, na atekiccho.

      When such a person causes a schism in the Sangha, he’s not irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.

1086. 1086

      पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ उपालि,u·pā·li भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मंdham·maṃ अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti दीपेतिdī·pe·ti …पे…pe

      Puna caparaṁ, upāli, bhikkhu dhammaṁ adhammoti dīpeti …pe…

      Again, a monk proclaims what’s in accordance with the Teaching as contrary to it …

1087. 1087

      दुट्ठुल्लंduṭ·ṭhul·laṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti दीपेति।dī·pe·ti

      duṭṭhullaṁ āpattiṁ aduṭṭhullā āpattīti dīpeti.

      or a minor offense as grave.

1088. 1088

      तस्मिंtas·miṃ धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi भेदेbhe·de धम्मदिट्ठि,dham·ma·diṭ·ṭhi अविनिधायa·vi·ni·dhā·ya दिट्ठिं,diṭ·ṭhiṃ अविनिधायa·vi·ni·dhā·ya खन्तिं,khan·tiṃ अविनिधायa·vi·ni·dhā·ya रुचिं,ru·ciṃ अविनिधायa·vi·ni·dhā·ya भावं,bhā·vaṃ अनुस्सावेति,a·nus·sā·ve·ti सलाकंsa·lā·kaṃ गाहेति—gā·he·ti

      Tasmiṁ dhammadiṭṭhi, bhede dhammadiṭṭhi, avinidhāya diṭṭhiṁ, avinidhāya khantiṁ, avinidhāya ruciṁ, avinidhāya bhāvaṁ, anussāveti, salākaṁ gāheti—

      He has the view that what he says is legitimate and the view that the schism is legitimate. He doesn’t misrepresent his view of what’s true, his belief of what’s true, his acceptance of what’s true, or his sentiment of what’s true. He makes a proclamation and distributes ballots, saying,

1089. 1089

      ‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

      ‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

      ‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; take this, approve of this.’

1090. 1090

      अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho उपालि,u·pā·li सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko नna आपायिको,ā·pā·yi·ko नna नेरयिको,ne·ra·yi·ko नna कप्पट्ठो,kap·paṭ·ṭho नna अतेकिच्छो”ति।a·te·kic·cho

      Ayampi kho, upāli, saṅghabhedako na āpāyiko, na nerayiko, na kappaṭṭho, na atekiccho”ti.

      When such a person causes a schism in the Sangha, he too isn’t irredeemably destined to an eon in hell.”

1091. 1091

      ततियभाणवारोta·ti·ya·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

      Tatiyabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

      The third section for recitation is finished.

1092. 1092

      सङ्घभेदकक्खन्धकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·kak·khan·dha·ko सत्तमो।sat·ta·mo

      Saṅghabhedakakkhandhako sattamo.

      The seventh chapter on schism in the Sangha is finished.

1093. 1093

      तस्सुद्दानंtas·sud·dā·naṃ

      Tassuddānaṁ

      This is the summary:

1094. 1094

      अनुपियेa·nu·pi·ye अभिञ्ञाता,a·bhiñ·ñā·tā

      Anupiye abhiññātā,

      “At Anupiya, well-known,

1095. 1095

      सुखुमालोsu·khu·mā·lo नna इच्छति;ic·cha·ti

      sukhumālo na icchati;

      Great comfort, did not wish;

1096. 1096

      कसाka·sā वपाva·pā अभिa·bhi निन्ने,nin·ne

      Kasā vapā abhi ninne,

      Plow, sow, irrigate, drain,

1097. 1097

      निद्धाnid·dhā लावेlā·ve चca उब्बहे।ub·ba·he

      niddhā lāve ca ubbahe.

      Weed, and cut, gather.

1098. 1098

      पुञ्जमद्दपलालञ्च,puñ·ja·mad·da·pa·lā·lañ·ca

      Puñjamaddapalālañca,

      Sheaves, thresh, and straw,

1099. 1099

      भुसओफुणनीहरे;bhu·sa·o·phu·ṇa·nī·ha·re

      bhusaophuṇanīhare;

      Husk, winnow, storage;

1100. 1100

      आयतिम्पिā·ya·tim·pi नna खीयन्ति,khī·yan·ti

      Āyatimpi na khīyanti,

      Also the future, they never stop,

1101. 1101

      पितरोpi·ta·ro चca पितामहा।pi·tā·ma·hā

      pitaro ca pitāmahā.

      And fathers, grandfathers.

1102. 1102

      भद्दियोbhad·di·yo अनुरुद्धोa·nu·rud·dho च,ca

      Bhaddiyo anuruddho ca,

      Bhaddiya, and Anuruddha,

1103. 1103

      आनन्दोā·nan·do भगुbha·gu किमिलो;ki·mi·lo

      ānando bhagu kimilo;

      Ānanda, Bhagu, Kimila;

1104. 1104

      सक्यमानोsak·ya·mā·no चca कोसम्बिं,ko·sam·biṃ

      Sakyamāno ca kosambiṁ,

      And Sakyan pride, Kosambī,

1105. 1105

      परिहायिpa·ri·hā·yi ककुधेनka·ku·dhe·na च।ca

      parihāyi kakudhena ca.

      Disappeared, and with Kakudha.

1106. 1106

      पकासेसिpa·kā·se·si पितुनोpi·tu·no च,ca

      Pakāsesi pituno ca,

      He announced, and of the father,

1107. 1107

      पुरिसेpu·ri·se सिलंsi·laṃ नाळागिरिं;nā·ḷā·gi·riṃ

      purise silaṁ nāḷāgiriṁ;

      Men, stone, Nāḷāgiri;

1108. 1108

      तिकपञ्चगरुकोti·ka·pañ·ca·ga·ru·ko खो,kho

      Tikapañcagaruko kho,

      A triad, five, serious,

1109. 1109

      भिन्दिbhin·di थुल्लच्चयेनthul·lac·ca·ye·na च;ca

      bhindi thullaccayena ca;

      He split, and with a serious offense;

1110. 1110

      तयोta·yo अट्ठaṭ·ṭha पुनpu·na तीणि,tī·ṇi

      Tayo aṭṭha puna tīṇi,

      Three, eight, again, three,

1111. 1111

      राजिrā·ji भेदाbhe·dā सियाsi·yā नुnu खोति।kho·ti

      rāji bhedā siyā nu khoti.

      Fracture, schism, might there be.”

1112. 1112

      सङ्घभेदकक्खन्धकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·kak·khan·dha·ko निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

      Saṅghabhedakakkhandhako niṭṭhito.

      The chapter on schism in the Sangha is finished.

Sources. Sanskrit: Satyavedaḥ, the New Testament in Sanskrit (Calcutta Baptist Missionaries, 1851; J. Wenger’s revision of W. Carey’s version). Digital text © 2018 SanskritBible.in, via eBible.org, licensed CC BY-SA 4.0; changed here: arranged by verse and every word linked to the dictionary (links made automatically). Old Testament Sanskrit: the Old Testament in Sanskrit, Calcutta Baptist Mission Press, 1848–1852 (public domain), read by OCR from the Internet Archive scans of the Boston University School of Theology copy; unproofread, with machine clean-up only. Pāli Canon: Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka Buddhavasse 2500 (based on the Vipassana Research Institute’s Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana edition), from SuttaCentral bilara-data, CC0; Devanagari and pronunciation made automatically from the Roman text. Pāli English: Bhikkhu Sujato (suttas) and Bhikkhu Brahmali (Vinaya), SuttaCentral, CC0. Pāli word meanings: the Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary (Rhys Davids & Stede), corrected reprint © The Pali Text Society, CC BY-NC 3.0, digital text from BuddhaDust; word matching automatic. English: King James Version (1769), public domain; words the translators added are in italics. Word meanings and pronunciations: Monier-Williams, Sanskrit–English Dictionary (1872), via this site’s Sanskrit dictionary (CC BY-SA 4.0); English↔Sanskrit word matches made automatically and may need checking.